BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual PDF
en
Summary of Content for BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual PDF
The Ultimate Driving Machine
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
328i 328xi
335i 335xi
Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 014 258 US English VIII/07, 07 09 500 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic- ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 252.
Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 6 Reporting safety defects
At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice command system
Controls 28 Opening and closing 45 Adjustments 56 Transporting children safely 59 Driving 74 Everything under control 88 Technology for driving comfort and
safety 100 Lamps 104 Climate 110 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips 124 Things to remember when driving
Navigation 132 Starting the navigation system 134 Destination entry 147 Destination guidance 156 What to do if
Entertainment 160 On/off and settings 164 Radio 170 Satellite radio 173 CD player and CD changer 179 AUX-In port 180 USB-audio interface
Communications 186 Telephoning 201 BMW Assist
Mobility 210 Refueling 212 Wheels and tires 224 Under the hood 229 Maintenance 231 Replacing components 236 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference 244 Technical data 248 Short commands for the voice command
system 252 Everything from A-Z
N o
te s
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual We have tried to make all the information in this Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as well; it is an important component of your vehi- cle.
Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be glad to advise you at any time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, can also be found on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
5
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The individual vehicle When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari- ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual describes the entire array of options and equip- ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. You should therefore have the corresponding work on your vehicle per- formed only by your BMW center or at a work- shop that works according to BMW repair pro- cedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out prop- erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim- ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
N o
te s
6
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<
Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831- 1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov
7
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can- ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.
C o
ck p
it
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 52
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb monitor* 52
1 Convertible: opening and closing windows jointly 39
2 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 38
3 Opening and closing front windows 38
6 Parking lamps 100
Low beams 100
Automatic headlamp control* 100 Adaptive Head Light* 101
7 Fog lamps 102
A t
a g
la n
ce
11
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
9 Instrument cluster 12
12 Ignition lock 59
13 Buttons* on the steering wheel
14 Horn: the entire surface
15 Adjusting the steering wheel 53
17 Releasing the hood 224
18 Opening the luggage compartment lid*
8 Turn signals 63
High beams, headlamp flasher 102
Roadside parking lamps* 102
Computer 75
Settings and information about the vehicle 78
Instrument lighting 103
10 Windshield wipers 64
Rain sensor* 64
11 Switching the ignition on/off and starting/stopping the engine 59
Telephone*:
> Press: accepting and ending a call, starting dialing* selected phone numbers. Redialing if no phone number is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Changing radio station Selecting music track Scrolling through phone book and lists with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable 54
Individually programmable 54
16 Cruise control* 66
Active cruise control* 67
C o
ck p
it
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for active cruise control* 67
5 Tachometer 74
6 Engine oil temperature 75
7 Display for
> Clock 74
> Outside temperature 74
> Indicator and warning lamps 83
8 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission* 61
> Computer 75
> Date of next scheduled service, and remaining distance to be driven 79
> Odometer and trip odometer 74
> Checking engine oil level* 225
> Settings and information 78
> There is a Check Control message 83
9 Fuel gauge 75
10 Resetting the trip odometer 74
A t
a g
la n
ce
13
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning and thus come on briefly when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to page 83.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps notify you that certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 102
Fog lamps* 102
Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is regulating the propul- sive forces in order to maintain driving stability 90
Parking brake applied 60
Canada: parking brake applied 60
Engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 230 Canada: engine malfunction with adverse effect on exhaust emissions 230
C o
ck p
it
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
A t
a g
la n
ce
15
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
1 Coupe: microphone for voice command system* and for telephone in hands-free mode* Convertible: microphone on steering col- umn
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request call* 236
3 Reading lamps 103
4 Coupe: glass roof, electric* 39
5 Interior lamps 103
6 Passenger airbag status lamp* 98
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 90
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control
12 Ejecting audio CD 160
13 Changing
> Radio station 164
> Track 174
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD 132
18 Controller 16 Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon- tally in four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
21 Drive for navigation DVD 132
22 Programmable memory keys 21
23 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust- ing volume 160
24 Drive for audio CD 160
Air distribution to the windshield 105
Air distribution to the upper body area 105
Air distribution to the footwell 105
Automatic air distribution and flow rate 106
Cooling function 107
AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 106
Recirculated-air mode 106
Maximum cooling 106
Residual heat mode 107
Air flow rate 106
Defrosting windows 107
Rear window defroster 107
17 Heated seats* 49
PDC Park Distance Control* 88
Coupe: Roller sun blind* 113
Coupe: HDC Hill Descent Control* 90
20 Convertible: Opening and closing retractable hardtop 41
iD ri
ve
16
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num- ber of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a single central position. The following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the indi- vidual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button Opening start menu
3 Controller The controller can be used to select menu items and to adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrow 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Push, arrow 6
Operate the controller only when traffic and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<
A t
a g
la n
ce
17
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Menu overview
Communication > Telephone* > BMW Assist* or TeleService*
Navigation > Navigation system
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the average fuel consumption
Entertainment > Radio
> CD player and CD changer* > AUX-In port, USB-audio interface* for
external audio device
Climate > Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Parked car operation
menu > Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central locking system
> Display of service requirements and dates for statutory inspections
> Settings for telephone
Operating principle As of radio readiness, the following message appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message: Press the controller. The start menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via five menu items.
Opening start menu Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
iD ri
ve
18
Calling up menu items in the start menu
As of radio readiness, refer to page 59: Via the start menu you can call up the four menu items of Communication, Navigation, Entertain- ment and Climate by moving the controller for- wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.
You can call up the menu by pressing the con- troller.
Convenient call-up of menu items The convenient call-up function enables you to:
> Call up a menu item from the start menu in the view last displayed
> Switch directly between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without having to press the button
To do so, move the controller in the corre- sponding direction and hold it for more than approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last selected.
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as numerical values.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
A t
a g
la n
ce
19
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Operating principle at a glance The following is a general description of opera- tions using iDrive.
For an exemplary step-by-step application refer to Setting the time, page 81.
1 Selecting a menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight marker moves
> Menu items in white can be selected by highlighting them
2 Activating a menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the function is executed
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Switching between fields:
> Briefly move the controller to the left, right, forward, or backward
> Release the controller
> The active field is brighter in color
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn the controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed
> Confirm by changing the field
iD ri
ve
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment: Radio, CD or
> Telephone* in "Communication": Name of the connected mobile phone, network search or no network
> "BMW Assist"*: Active voice connection with a BMW Assist service
2 Entertainment audio output off
3 Display for traffic information*:
"TI":
Traffic information for the navigation sys- tem can be received and transmission is switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"* > Roaming active
5 It is possible to make calls* if the mobile phone is paired with the vehicle
Reception strength of mobile phone network, display depending on mobile phone
6 Time
Other displays: Status information is temporarily hidden during Check Control message displays or entries via the voice command system*.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the assistance window:
> The computer or the trip computer* > The arrow or map view in vehicles with nav-
igation system* > The current position*
Selecting display 1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con- troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
A t
a g
la n
ce
21
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Switching assistance window on/off 1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con- troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the controller.
To turn back on, switch to the assistance win- dow and press the controller.
Switching Control Display off/on 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control- ler.
Press the controller to switch on.
Programmable memory keys Using the programmable memory keys, you can store and execute certain iDrive functions:
> Navigation destinations*
> Entertainment:
> Radio stations
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer
> AUX
> Telephone: phone numbers
The assignment of the programmable memory keys is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Storing functions
Navigation destinations* 1. Select the navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or address book.
2. ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.
Special features:
> If destination guidance and the map view have been started, the current destination is stored.
> If the destination is entered via map, the coordinates in the crosshairs are stored, not the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers 1. Enter the phone number or select the num-
ber from a list of stored phone numbers, e.g. the A-Z list.
2. ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.
If the phone number is associated with a name, the name is also stored.
Entertainment The item stored in the Entertainment menu is the source that is playing at the time of storage, e.g. a radio station, irrespective of what was selected on the Control Display.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta- tion or CD.
2. ... Press the key longer than 2 seconds.
iD ri
ve
22
If the car is equipped with two drives and a CD with compressed audio files is played,
the current track is stored.<
Executing a function ... Press the key.
The function is executed immediately. This means that, for example, if a phone number is selected, the connection is established, or if a navigation destination is called up, destination guidance is started.
Displaying memory key assignments You can have the assignment of a memory key displayed by touching the key with your finger. Please do not wear gloves when doing so. Touching the keys with an object such as a pen will not work.
Displaying brief information ... Touch the key.
The key assignment is displayed.
Navigation destination
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information ... Touch the key for a longer
period.
Clearing key assignments 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
A t
a g
la n
ce
23
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
Voice command system
The concept The voice command system allows you to con- trol operation of various vehicle systems with- out removing your hands from the steering wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. It is not neces- sary to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your oral commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special microphone located in the area of the interior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition Via iDrive, select the language in which the voice command system is operating, so that the spoken commands can be identified. Selecting the language for iDrive, refer to page 86.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice command system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal indicate that the voice command system is ready to receive spo- ken commands.
2. Say the command. The command appears on the Control Dis- play.
This symbol appears on the Control Display when you can enter additional commands. If no further commands are possible, continue by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice command system Press the button on the steering wheel or
Commands
Having the possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi- ble commands related to the selected menu
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the voice command system.
{Cancel}
V o
ic e
co m
m an
d s
ys te
m
24
item on the Control Display. To have the possible commands read out to you:
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the commands available for operating the CD player and CD changer are read out*.
Opening help
Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via short commands Short commands enable you to perform certain functions immediately, irrespective of which menu item is selected, refer to page 248.
Opening the start menu
Example: selecting a track 1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment} The system says: {{Entertainment}}
4. {CD} The system says: {{CD on}}
A t
a g
la n
ce
25
R e
fe re
n ce
C o
n tr
o ls
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
C om
m un
ic at
io ns
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
M o
b il
it y
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Notes For information on voice control of the telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- ing:
> Pronounce the commands and digits smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses. The same applies to spelling when entering a destina- tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan- guage of the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and no abbrevia- tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.
6. Select a track, e.g.: {Track 1} The system says: {{Track 1}}
Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote controls
Each remote control contains a rechargeable battery that is automatically recharged when it is in the ignition lock while the car is being driven. Use each remote control at least twice a year for longer road trips in order to maintain the batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient access*, the remote control contains a replace- able battery, refer to page 38.
The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per- sonal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service require- ments is stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in the remote control, page 229.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 113
> Driver's door, refer to page 32
> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33
New remote controls Your BMW center can supply new remote con- trols with integrated keys as additional units or as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept You can set many of your BMW's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Without any action on your part, Personal Pro- file ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. When you unlock the car, the remote control used for the purpose is recognized and the set- tings stored for it are called up and imple- mented.
This means that your personal settings will be activated for you, even if in the meantime your car was used by someone else with another remote control and the corresponding settings. The individual settings are stored for up to three remote controls.
Personal Profile settings For more information on specific settings, refer to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory keys, refer to page 21
> Response of the central locking system when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 32
> Automatic call-up* of the driver's seat posi- tion after unlocking, refer to page 50
> Programming buttons* on the steering wheel, refer to page 54
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 64
C o
n tr
o ls
29
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis- play and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to page 82
> Date format, refer to page 83
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 86
> Language on the Control Display, refer to page 86
> Units of measure for fuel consumption, distance covered/remaining distances, and temperature, refer to page 78
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con- trol PDC*, refer to page 88
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 100
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 101
> Daytime running lamps, refer to page 101
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac- tivating AUTO program, cooling function and automatic recirculated-air control, set- ting temperature, air flow rate and distribu- tion, refer to page 105 ff
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume, refer to page 161
> Tone control, refer to page 161
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer to page 161
Central locking system
The concept The central locking system is ready for opera- tion whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid
> Fuel filler door
> Convertible: center armrest and glove com- partment
Operating from outside > Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
> In cars with convenient access*, via the handles on the driver's and front passen- ger's doors
The anti-theft system is also operated at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. In addition, if the remote control is used, the welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's courtesy lamps* are switched on or off. The alarm system* is also armed or disarmed. For further details of the alarm system,refer to page 35.
Operating from inside By means of the button for central locking, refer to page 32.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte- rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing: Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the retractable hardtop with the remote control, the
doors and luggage compartment lid must be closed and the cargo bay partition must be folded down and engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 41.<
Unlocking Press the button. The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps* and the welcome lamps come on.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
30
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con- troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only" Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening Hold the button down. The windowsand the glass roof* are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening* Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle you can open the retractable hardtop using the remote control.
Hold the button down. The windowsand the retractable hardtop are opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the win- dows move up.
Watch during the opening process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking Press the button.
Convertible: convenient closing* Within a range of approx. 13 ft/4 m from the vehicle you can close the retractable hardtop and the windows using the remote control.
Hold the button down. The retractable hardtop and the windows are closed.
Watch during the closing process to ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
C o
n tr
o ls
31
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Switching on interior lamps While the car is locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short distance, regardless of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings back and up when opened. Ensure that
there is sufficient clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not place the remote control in the cargo bay. A previously locked luggage compartment lid is locked again after closing. Before and after each trip, check that the lug- gage compartment lid has not been inadvert- ently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading* Within a range of approx. 13ft/4m from the vehi- cle you can use the remote control to half close the retractable hardtop when it is open to ease loading of the cargo bay.
1. Briefly press the button and, within one second, press again and hold until the retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate position. The luggage compartment lid opens slightly.
2. Open the luggage compartment lid, press the cargo bay partition upward and stow the cargo in the cargo bay.
3. Press down the cargo bay partition until it engages on both sides and close the lug- gage compartment lid.
4. Press the button for a longer period to fold the retractable hardtop back in.
Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con- troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press the controller. The signal is activated.
Malfunctions The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the remote control is interrupted briefly, the move- ment will be completed more quickly if you keep the corresponding button pressed continu- ously.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote control, the battery in the remote control is dis- charged. Use the remote control on an extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to page 28. The remote control for convenient access* contains a battery that may have to be changed, refer to page 38.
For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
32
Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:
FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS
Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter- ference, and
> This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing: Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is unlocked, refer to page 29.
Convenient operation You can use the door lock to operate the win- dows and the coupe's glass roof* or the con- vertible's retractable hardtop.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or locking.
During each closing procedure, and when opening the retractable hardtop, watch
the process and ensure that no one becomes trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera- tion.<
Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the integrated key to the corresponding limit posi- tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing: From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti- vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking You can also set the situations in which the car locks:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
C o
n tr
o ls
33
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle after a short time when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving" The central locking system automati- cally locks the vehicle as soon as you drive off.
8. Press the controller. The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors > Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the armrest or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
Locking > Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter can be opened from outside.<
Luggage compartment lid In order to avoid damage, make sure there is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on the remote control for a longer period. The lug- gage compartment lid will open slightly. It can now be swung upwards.
Opening manually The integrated key of the remote control, refer to page 28, fits the luggage compartment lid lock.
If you open the luggage compartment lid using the key while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off an alarm, refer to page 35.<
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
34
Coupe
Turn the key all the way to the left: the luggage compartment lid opens.
Convertible
Turn the key all the way to the left beyond the two resistance points: the luggage compart- ment lid opens.
It may be necessary to close the luggage com- partment lid with more momentum since the assisted closing of the luggage compartment lid does not work if there is an electrical mal- function.
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Locking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1. The luggage compartment lid is locked and cannot be unlocked using the central locking system. If you give the remote control without the inte- grated key to someone else while the glove compartment is locked, the luggage compart- ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan- tage when valet parking, for example. Locking the glove compartment, refer to page 113.
Unlocking separately Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.
Closing The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear, other-
wise injuries may result.<
C o
n tr
o ls
35
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Coupe
Convertible To close the luggage compartment lid, press it down lightly. The lid is closed
automatically.<
Alarm system*
The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage com- partment lid is opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior motion sensor, refer to page 36
> When the car's inclination changes, for instance if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
> When there is an interruption in the power supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid even when the alarm system is armed, by pressing the button on the remote control, refer to page 31. The lid is locked and moni- tored again as soon as you close it.
Panic mode* You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation:
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm > Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 29.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to mon- itor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
36
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking: your vehicle has not been disturbed while you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted in the ignition, but for no longer than approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and glass roof must be completely closed*.
Convertible The interior of the car is monitored up to the height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys- tem is activated together with the interior motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unin- tentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This pre- vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains, boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse- quently locked again.
Convenient access* Convenient access enables you to enter your vehicle without needing to hold the remote con- trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the remote control close to your body, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre- sponding remote control within the immediate vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately
> Engine starting
> Convenient closure
Functional requirement > The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid
can only be locked when the vehicle detects that the remote control currently in use is outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the vehicle detects that the remote control cur- rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote control In general, there is no difference between using convenient access or pressing the buttons on the remote control to carry out the functions mentioned above. You should therefore first familiarize yourself with the instructions on opening and closing starting on page 28.
Special features regarding the use of conve- nient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or closing windows, the glass roof or retract-
able hardtop, the system is checking whether a
C o
n tr
o ls
37
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
remote control is inside the vehicle. Please repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec- essary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas- senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre- sponds to pressing the button.
Locking Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing the button.
To preserve the battery, please make sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closure For convenient closure, keep your finger on the surface, arrow 2.
Unlocking the luggage compartment lid separately Press the button on the outside of the luggage compartment lid. This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con- trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage compartment lid is closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning flashers flash and an acoustic signal* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the start/stop button, refer to page 59.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch, otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting the engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert a remote control into the ignition switch, refer to page 59.
Switching off the engine in cars with automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off when the selector lever is in position P, refer to page 60. To switch the engine off when the selector lever is in position N, the remote control must be in the ignition switch.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic transmission into a car wash 1. Insert remote control into ignition switch.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Malfunction Convenient access may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this happens, open or close the vehicle via the buttons on the remote con- trol or using the integrated key. To start the engine afterward, insert the remote control into the ignition switch.
Warning lamps The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when you attempt to start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote control with you inside the vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert another remote control into the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up while the engine is running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
38
switched off, the engine can only be restarted within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on and a message appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery The remote control for convenient access con- tains a battery that will need to be replaced from time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control, refer to page 28.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac- ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collec- tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows To prevent injuries, watch the windows while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the electric windows and possibly injure them- selves.<
Opening, closing
Coupe
> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.
Convertible: individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point: The window opens as long as you press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not close automatically.
C o
n tr
o ls
39
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Convertible: jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point: All windows open as long as you press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: All windows open automatically. Press the switch again to stop the opening move- ment.
> Pull the switch: All windows close as long as you pull the switch.
After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no door is opened.
For information on convenient operation via the remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29 or 32. For information on closing with conve- nient access, refer to Locking on page 30.
Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc- tions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories that might inter- fere with window movement. Otherwise the pinch protection system could be impaired. Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win- dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win- dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protection.
Coupe: glass roof*, electric To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you leave the car, otherwise children could operate the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the slid- ing visor opens slightly.
> The open glass roof automatically travels into the raised position. The sliding visor remains completely open.
Opening, closing > Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point. The glass roof and the sliding visor open
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
40
together as long as you hold the switch in this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis- tance point. The glass roof and the sliding visor open automatically. Briefly press the switch again to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on convenient operation via the remote control or door lock, refer to page 29 or 32.
After switching off the ignition When the remote control is removed or the igni- tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has been opened.
Pinch protection system If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur- ing closing from approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or during closing from the raised position, the closing movement is interrupted and the glass roof is opened again slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the roof would con- tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection If there is an external danger, press the switch forward past the resistance point. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical power supply After a power failure, there is a possibility that the glass roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. BMW recommends having this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually* In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior lamps using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 231.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench* supplied with the onboard tool kit, refer to page 231, into the
C o
n tr
o ls
41
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
opening provided. Move the glass roof in the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable hardtop The retractable hardtop combines reliable weather protection with simple and convenient operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving pleasure in your convertible:
> It is advisable that you close the retractable hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle interior against unanticipated weather dam- age, it also offers theft protection. However, even when the hardtop is closed, valuables should only be stored in the locked cargo bay.
> Do not attach roof rack systems to the retractable hardtop, and in particular do not attach magnetic racks.
> Do not attach rack systems to the luggage compartment lid, and in particular do not attach magnetic racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated, the luggage compartment lid swings back and up. Before operating the retractable hardtop, ensure that there is enough clear- ance, e.g. when parked in front of a wall.
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g. after driving in the rain, water may drip into the cargo bay. If necessary, remove items
from the cargo bay beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.
Do not place any objects on the retract- able hardtop or on the luggage compart-
ment lid, otherwise they could fall during move- ments of the retractable hardtop and cause damage or injury. Never move the retractable hardtop when the rollover protection system is in the activated position. Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or closed may result in damage or injury. Do not reach into the mechanism while the hardtop is opening or closing. Keep children away from the swiveling area of the retractable hardtop.<
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved at temperatures below +147/106. A
message appears on the Control Display.<
The retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not drive off until the hardtop has stopped mov- ing.<
Before opening and closing > Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo bay partition is folded down and engaged on both sides, refer to page 117, otherwise it will not be possible to open the retractable hardtop.
> Do not place any objects next to or on the cargo bay partition and close the storage compartment on the left side of the cargo bay.
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height under the cargo bay partition; refer to the label in the cargo bay showing a line indicat- ing the maximum height.
> Ensure that the luggage compartment lid is closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly level ground. Excessive angle is indicated by a lamp.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
42
Opening and closing When the vehicle is stationary and at radio readiness or beyond, refer to page 59:
If possible, conserve the battery by only operating the retractable hardtop when
the engine is running. Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove all foreign objects from the windshield frame as these could prevent the hardtop from closing properly.<
1 Pull button: open the retractable hardtop. Push button: close the retractable hardtop.
2 LEDs
The side windows move down slightly when the switch for hardtop operation is
pulled or pushed.<
If you push or pull the switch for a longer period after the LED 2 goes out, the windows move up again.<
LEDs In the following situations, a message appears on the Control Display or an acoustic signal sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the top is fully opened or closed.
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you release the switch, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the switch is pressed, the cargo bay partition is folded up, the luggage compartment lid is not closed, the vehicle is standing on a strong incline or there is a malfunction. The retractable hardtop cannot be moved.
Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pushing or pulling the switch.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or closed is a safety hazard.
Do not interrupt and resume the closing proce- dure several times in close succession as this could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or closed, the luggage compartment lid can-
not be opened and the windows cannot be moved.<
Convenient operation with remote control or via door lock Refer to pages 30 and 32.
Wind deflector* The wind deflector keeps air movements in the passenger compartment to a minimum when the hardtop is open and provides an even more comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.
Installation The wind deflector is stored in a protective cover in the cargo bay. Brief instructions for operation can be found on the protective cover.
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec- tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
C o
n tr
o ls
43
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of the wind deflector until the catch engages, arrow 2.
3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the opening provided on the right side of the vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the protective caps beforehand, if necessary.
4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the opening provided on the left side of the vehicle until it snaps into place.
5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of arrow 6 as far as the symbol to insert the left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec- tor.
With the wind deflector installed: do not recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this would damage the wind deflector.<
Only turn the rotary handle within the range between the two symbols, other-
wise the cable system inside the wind deflector could be damaged.<
Removing the wind deflector Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal- lation.
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for the holders of the wind deflector.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of the wind deflector and push the two halves apart.
Loading function Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the vehicle even if the wind deflector has been installed.
1. Lower all windows.
2. Fold down the top section of the wind deflector, arrow 1.
O p
en in
g a
n d
c lo
si n
g
44
3. Turn the rotary handle to position , arrow 2.
Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.
To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag holders, you can fold the rear backrest down, refer to page 118.
C o
n tr
o ls
45
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Adjustments
Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con- junction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seated position has a major influence on your safety in the event of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys- tems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to observe the instructions contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 56.
Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or arms in the event of the airbag being triggered off. No one and nothing is to come between the air- bags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air- bag is triggered. Make sure that passengers do not lean their heads against the side or head airbags, other- wise serious injuries could result if the airbags suddenly deployed.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.
For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 97.
Head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 47.
Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits low across the hips and does not press against the abdomen. The safety belt must not rest against the throat, run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag- ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt so that it sits as snugly as possible against the lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other- wise the belt could slide over your hips and injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 51.
Seats
Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
A d
ju st
m en
ts
46
accident. On the front passenger seat as well, do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan- ger in the event of an accident of sliding under the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor- mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint height on page 47, and on damaged safety belts on page 51.
Manual adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Longitudinal direction Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired position. After releasing the lever, move the seat gently forward or back to make sure it engages prop- erly.
Height Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back- rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for- ward or back.
Electrical adjustment Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
C o
n tr
o ls
47
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
5 Convertible: head restraints
Coupe: the head restraints are adjusted manu- ally, refer to Head restraints below.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit your individual preferences by adjusting the lat- eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch. Backrest width decreases or increases accord- ingly.
Longitudinal adjustment from outside/ behind*
To move the front seats forward or backward from outside or from one of the rear seats: with the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end 2 of the switch.
Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove a head restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Reinstall the head restraint before
A d
ju st
m en
ts
48
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise, the passenger will be without protection from the head restraint.<
Front seats
Coupe: height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.
Coupe: removing 1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint all the way out.
Convertible: height adjustment
> To raise: press the button upward.
> To lower: press the button downward.
Coupe: rear seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and slide the head restraint down.
Removing 1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat backrest slightly forward and pull the head restraint all the way out.
Only remove the head restraints if no pas- sengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall
head restraints before transporting passengers in the rear.<
Entering the rear seats
Coupe: seat with manual longitudinal adjustment
Convenient entry The convenient entry feature includes a mem- ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
C o
n tr
o ls
49
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1. Pull the lever and swing the backrest for- ward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position Push the seat backward and swing the backrest back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and back- rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.<
Seat with electrical longitudinal adjustment
Coupe
Convertible Seat backrest warning lamp: Comes on when a seat backrest is not engaged. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
Convenient entry The convenient entry feature includes a mem- ory function for the longitudinal adjustment and backrest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat automatically stops in its previous position, and fold the backrest back. If you release the switch before the previous seat position is reached, the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged. Before driving off, engage both seats and back- rests so that they are locked in place. Otherwise there is a risk of accident due to an unexpected movement.<
Heated seats*
Press once for each temperature level. Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
A d
ju st
m en
ts
50
To switch off: Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx. the next 15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is switched off entirely to save on battery power. The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory* You can store and call up two different combi- nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup- port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition, refer to page 59.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the desired positions.
3. Press the button. The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi- tions are stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Call-up Do not call up memory while you are driv- ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-
ment could result in an accident.<
Convenience mode 1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 59.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 59.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 and keep it pressed until the adjustment process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally: Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control The driver's seat position last stored is stored for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles. Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or damage to objects as a result of a rearward movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately when you touch a seat adjustment switch or one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
C o
n tr
o ls
51
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con- troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".
9. Press the controller.
Switching off automatic call-up Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Safety belts Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.
Closing Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop- erly, refer to page 45.
Opening 1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front seats
The indicator lamp comes on and an acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a message appears on the Control Dis- play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas- tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts If the safety belts are damaged or stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child- restraint systems, replaced and the belt anchors checked. Have this work done only by your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
A d
ju st
m en
ts
52
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is not guaranteed that the safety devices will func- tion properly.<
Coupe: belt hand-over
The concept The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to fasten your safety belt. When you close the door and switch on radio readiness or the igni- tion, the belt hand-over extends automatically and presents the in a position that is convenient for fastening it around you. After you have fas- tened your safety belt, the belt hand-over retracts to its original position.
Even if you have not yet fastened your safety belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:
> Wait for more than approx. one minute
> Open the corresponding door
> Start to drive.
Closing the respective door reactivates the belt hand-over if the ignition or radio-readiness is on.
Front passenger's seat The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is occupied and after the front passenger's door is closed.
Pinch protection system If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the opposite direction and stops in this position. To reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close the door or switch the ignition off and on.
Although there is a pinch protection sys- tem, always check that the maneuvering
area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it cannot be ensured that the system will stop moving in certain extreme situations.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors The front passenger's mirror is more con- vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind you on the basis of what you see in the mirror; otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci- dent.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic curb monitor*
3 Folding mirrors in and out* The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored* for the remote control currently in use*. The stored position is called up automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out* At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/ 20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar- row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into their correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are
C o
n tr
o ls
53
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before entering an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with
button 3, to prevent them from being damaged due to the width of the vehicle.<
Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function automatic curb monitor*
Activating 1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector lever to position R. The glass of the mirror on the passenger side tilts slightly down. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into a parking space.
Deactivating Push the switch to the position for the passen- ger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head- lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior and exterior mirrors* is controlled by two photo cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments Do not adjust the steering wheel position while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move- ment.<
A d
ju st
m en
ts
54
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seated posi- tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Programmable buttons on the steering wheel You can program the buttons to suit your per- sonal preferences:
These settings are stored for the remote con- trol currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press the controller.
A list showing various functions is dis- played:
> "Navigation voice instructions" Voice messages from the navigation system*
> "Air recirculation on / off" Permanent shut-off of outside air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air con- trol on page 106
> "Mute on / off" To mute the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off" To switch the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"* To show/hide the phone book or last dis- played list of stored phone numbers
> "Next entertainment source" To change the audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the controller.
C o
n tr
o ls
55
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
6. Select a button, if appropriate, and press the controller.
You can operate the selected function using the corresponding button.
Operating a function Briefly press the appropriate button on the steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:
> Switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button for a longer period.
> To repeat the last voice instruction: Press the button briefly.
> To cancel a voice instruction during an announcement: Press the button briefly.
T ra
n sp
o rt
in g
c h
ild re
n s
af el
y
56
Transporting children safely
The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening the doors, for example.<
Children always in the rear Accident research has shown that the safest place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth- erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck- led in with a safety belt as soon as there no longer is any child-restraint system that is appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child- restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas- senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child traveling on that seat will face a significant risk of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even with a child-restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags refer to page 97.
Installing child-restraint systems
Observe the child-restraint system man- ufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems. Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin- ished.<
Standard child-restraint systems are designed to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child-restraint systems can increase the risk of injury to children. Always follow the installation instructions for the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat After installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen- ger are deactivated, otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Backrest width* The backrest width of the front passen- ger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. Do not change the setting after install- ing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's stability on the front passenger's seat is lim- ited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set- ting, refer to page 47.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's safety belt can be prevented from being pulled out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
To lock the safety belt 1. Secure the child-restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
C o
n tr
o ls
57
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil- dren.
To install and use the LATCH child restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac- turer of the system, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the backrest, otherwise the protective function of the seat may be compromised.<
The anchor points for the lower LATCH anchors are located behind the labeled protec- tive caps.
Coupe: child-restraint system with tether strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.<
For child-restraint systems with tether straps there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Coupe: placement of the tether strap Make sure the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other- wise the strap will not properly secure the child- restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint sys- tem
If necessary, fold the anchors upward before use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost position.
T ra
n sp
o rt
in g
c h
ild re
n s
af el
y
58
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
C o
n tr
o ls
59
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on. Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Convenient access* If the car is equipped with convenient access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock under special circumstances, refer to page 36.
Removing the remote control from the ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission You cannot take out the remote control unless the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio readiness or the ignition on or off.
The engine is started when you press the start/stop button and depress the clutch if
the car has manual transmission, or the brake if the car has automatic transmission.<
Radio readiness Individual electrical consumers can operate. The time and the outside temperature are dis- played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from the ignition lock
> In cars with convenient access*, by touch- ing the surface above the door lock, refer to Locking on page 37
Ignition on All electrical consumers can operate. The odometer and trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat- tery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis- plays in the instrument cluster go out.
D ri
vi n
g
60
Starting the engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre- sents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the car with the engine running, place the transmission in idle or move the selector lever to position P and forcefully apply the parking brake to prevent the car from mov- ing.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and there is a danger of overheating and damaging the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con- venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.
Automatic transmission Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con- venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to page 36.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain time, and stops automatically as soon as the engine has started.
Switching off the engine Always take the remote control with you when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force- fully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 59.
Automatic transmission 1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 59.
Parking brake The parking brake is primarily intended to pre- vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.
C o
n tr
o ls
61
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Indicator lamp The indicator lamp is lit, and when you drive off an acoustic signal sounds in addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con- tinuously press the button of the parking brake lever. Otherwise, excessive force on the parking brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak- ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the park- ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert- ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with Steptronic* In addition to fully automatic operation, you can also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to page 62.
Vehicle parking To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control In order to remove the remote control from the ignition lock, you must first move the selector lever to position P and switch off the engine: interlock. Removing the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 59.
Selector lever positions P R N D M/S +
D ri
vi n
g
62
Displays in the instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions > With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved out of position P: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N with the vehicle stationary, first depress the brake; otherwise the selector lever will refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to start.<
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag- ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel the lock, press the button on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.
P Park Select this only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.
R Reverse Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral, idle You can select this in a car wash, for example. The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for- ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con- sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi- tion D.
Kick-down Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full- throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual operation M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the left into the M/S shifting slot: The sport program is activated and DS is dis- played on the instrument cluster. This position is recommended for a performance-oriented driving style.
To use the automatic mode again, move the selector lever to the right into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever When you press the selector lever forwards or backwards, the manual mode is activated and Steptronic changes gear. M1 through M6 are displayed on the instrument cluster.
C o
n tr
o ls
63
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru- ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.
Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the steering wheel The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly since both hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission switches to manual mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear plane, manual mode remains active.<
> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.
> To shift down: press one of the shift pad- dles.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only when they will result in a plausible combination of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example, a downshift that would cause the engine to overrev will not be executed by the system. The gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru- ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock Should the selector lever refuse to move out of position P although the button on the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 231, press the red lever while moving the selector lever to the desired position.
Turn signals/ headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the resistance point.
D ri
vi n
g
64
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly Press the lever as far as the resistance point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation Press the lever as far as the resistance point. The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps* 5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.
Normal wiper speed Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter- mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed Press twice or press beyond the resistance point. The system switches to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time between wipes is controlled automatically and depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.
C o
n tr
o ls
65
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Activating intermittent wipe or rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but- ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter- ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps* Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use the washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are heated automatically while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original container that is kept out of reach of children, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury. Comply with the instructions on the con- tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck Only refill washer fluid when the engine is cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
D ri
vi n
g
66
Cruise control*
The concept Cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores and maintains the speed that you specify using the lever on the steering column. In order to maintain the specified speed, the system brakes the vehicle when the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control when driving at constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a result.<
Manual transmission You can shift gears while cruise control is acti- vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an extended period at very high or very low engine speeds, or the system is deactivated.
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat- ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler- ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2. The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to maintain the set speed if current engine power output is insufficient. If the engine braking effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys- tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system stores and maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is decreased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
C o
n tr
o ls
67
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Deactivating cruise control Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you switch gears very slowly or shift to idle in cars with manual transmission
> When you select the automatic transmis- sion's neutral position N
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved again and maintained.
Warning lamp The warning lamp comes on when cruise control has been deactivated by applying the parking brake or as a
result of DSC intervention. A message appears on the Control Display.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored speed is resumed and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are intervening
> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi- tion
> In cars with automatic transmission: when you engage selector lever position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 84.<
Malfunction The warning lamp comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You
can find more information starting on page 83.
Active cruise control*
The concept With active cruise control, you can select a desired speed which is not only automatically maintained when driving on open roadways, but also varied to maintain a selected distance set- ting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on high- ways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Espe- cially on longer trips, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and responsibly.
Within the limits of its capability, the system automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify
D ri
vi n
g
68
the distance to be maintained from the vehicle in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the distance is speed-dependent. Based on your selected distance setting, the system automat- ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig- nal a following driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver to downshift, depending on the kind of trans- mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main- tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected by increasing the throttle setting and shifting gears automatically or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed will be held when driving downhill, too.
Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and operates differently from con- ventional cruise control systems which you may be accustomed to, you are strongly urged to read all of the pages relating to this system before use. Pay special attention to the System limitations section beginning on page 71.
Braking sensation > If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-
tem is braking, pedal sensation will be slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking are normal.
Manual transmission You can shift gears while cruise control is acti- vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you should shift gears when you drive for an extended period at very high or very low engine speeds, or the system is deactivated.
Range of applications The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or 30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is 110 mph or 180 km/h.
As with conventional cruise control sys- tems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the drivers own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware- ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on highway-type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off- ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering inter- changes, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, especially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise driving situations could result that pose the risk of accidents.<
One lever for all functions
1 Store and increase desired speed
2 Store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system, refer to page 70
4 Resume stored desired speed and dis- tance, refer to page 70
5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead, refer to page 69
Storing current speed Briefly press the lever, arrow 1,or briefly pull it, arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.
C o
n tr
o ls
69
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed on the speedometer and briefly in the instru- ment cluster.
Increasing desired speed Press or tap the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis- played.
> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the resistance point, the desired speed is increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the maximum speed of 110 mph or 180 km/h is achieved.
The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.
Decreasing desired speed Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.
The other functions work analogously to those described under Increasing desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Press downward: Increase distance
> Press upward: Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.
Use good judgment to select the appro- priate following distance given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec- ommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3 This distance is always set when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine.
Distance 4
D ri
vi n
g
70
Deactivating cruise control
Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3. The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti- vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When the speed is reduced to below 20 mph or 30 km/h due to a traffic situation
> When you switch gears very slowly or shift to idle in cars with manual transmission
> When you select the automatic transmis- sion's neutral position N
> When you activate the Dynamic Traction Control DTC
> When you deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
> When the system does not recognize any objects for a longer period of time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoul- der or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt, refer to page 71
> When you apply the parking brake
When the system is deactivated, you must brake the vehicle yourself and/or
maneuver as necessary, otherwise there is a risk of accident.<
Warning lamp The warning lamp comes on when active cruise control has been auto- matically deactivated due to a driving
speed below 20 mph or 30 km/h, an application of the parking brake or a DSC intervention. A message appears on the Control Display.
Resuming stored desired speed and distance Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored speed and distance are regained and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are intervening
> In cars with manual transmission: when you shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi- tion
> In cars with automatic transmission: when you engage selector lever position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis- tance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control systems are intervening; cruise control is deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The indicator lights up as soon as the sys- tem is activated.
4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis- played
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
C o
n tr
o ls
71
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
are currently not met. Calling up Check Control messages, refer to page 84.<
Warning lamps The indicator 2 flashes in red; a signal sounds. The system indicates that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Active cruise con-
trol cannot automatically restore the distance to the vehicle ahead. This indicator does not release you from your responsibility to adapt your desired speed and driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow. The prerequisites for operating active cruise control are not met, e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC interventions. Active cruise control
is deactivated. You can reactivate the system, if desired, by tapping or pulling the lever when road and traffic conditions permit. It is not pos- sible to resume a stored speed.
Radar sensor
The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt, snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure to use particular care when removing any layers of snow or ice from the sensor.
When the radar sensor is not properly posi- tioned, active cruise control cannot be activated at all.
Malfunction The warning lamp comes on when the system has failed. A message appears on the Control Display. You
can find more information starting on page 83.
System limitations
Always remember that the range and abil- ity of the system does have physical limi-
tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi- cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback. It is also possible that the system may not
detect smaller moving objects such as motor- cycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering any of these situations as the sys- tem will neither automatically brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alert- ness.<
D ri
vi n
g
72
Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi- cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have selected. Be aware that changing to a clear, unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-
ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a highway may cause a delay in the system's reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in the lane next to you. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary.
While active cruise control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that the ability of the sys- tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle braking system. Therefore, the system cannot decrease your speed for large differences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.<
Active cruise control can only decelerate the vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane into your lane, active cruise control will not rec- ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane ahead of your vehicle.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance automatically. This also applies to great differences in speed between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of collision. Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehi- cle yourself. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.<
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system, it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and val- leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec- ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
C o
n tr
o ls
73
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
In approaching a curve, it is possible that active cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either case, you can choose to overcome the deceler- ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your responsibility Your actions have priority at all times. When you press the accelerator pedal while driving with active cruise control, the automatic braking function will be temporarily interrupted. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the desired speed or the selected distance to the vehicle ahead is achieved again.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator pedal and make sure that no objects such
as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal. Otherwise the system may not be able to brake the vehicle.<
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
74
Everything under control
Odometer, outside temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature display and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster > To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature and odometer briefly while the ignition is switched off
Units of measure To select the respective units of measure, miles or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for the outside temperature, refer to page 78.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display Setting the time, refer to page 81.
Outside temperature warning When the displayed temperature sinks to approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. There is an increased risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, otherwise there is an increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer Resetting trip odometer: With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked If you still want to view the time, outside tem- perature and odometer reading briefly after the remote control has been taken out of the igni- tion lock: Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
C o
n tr
o ls
75
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Coolant temperature A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi- tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis- play.
Check coolant level, refer to page 228.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at normal operating temper- ature, the engine oil temperature is between approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/ 1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes- sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 15.9 US gallons/ 60 liters.
You can find information on refueling on page 210.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve zone, a message briefly appears on the Control Display and the cruising range for the remaining amount of fuel is displayed on the computer. Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/ 50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis- play.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis- played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption* > No information
To set the corresponding units of measure, refer to Units of measure on page 78.
Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated on the basis of the way the car has been driven over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of fuel currently in the tank.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
76
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 77, you can have the average speed for another trip dis- played.
To reset average speed: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 77, you can have the average consumption for another trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the button in the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel consumption. This allows you to see whether your current driving style is conducive to fuel economy with mini- mum exhaust emissions.
Displays on the Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Car Data" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com- puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys- tem, refer to page 134
> Cruising range
> Distance to destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com- puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys- tem, refer to page 134
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values You can reset the values for average speed and average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your selection.
C o
n tr
o ls
77
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Entering a distance manually 1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically entered during destination guidance.
Trip computer The trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday trip.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con- troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all values to zero:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.
Display options You can display the computer or the trip com- puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con- troller.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Onboard info"
> "Trip computer"
3. Press the controller.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
78
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val- ues
> Calling up computer information 75
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting brightness 103
4 Calling up Check Control 83
5 Checking engine oil level 225
6 Setting the time 81
7 Setting the date 83
8 Viewing service requirement display 79
Exiting displays The outside-temperature reading and the time reappear when you press button 2 or if you make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If required, complete the current setting first.
Units of measure You can set units of measure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Units" is selected and press the con- troller.
C o
n tr
o ls
79
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
6. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.
7. Select the desired measurement unit and press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of the next scheduled service are displayed briefly immediately after you start the engine or switch on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can view the respective distance remaining or due date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 59.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa- nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual service items.
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions 2 Service requirements
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
80
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test* 5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may vary. The data for the next service appointment is shown first.
Supplementary information You can have further information on the scope of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis- play, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the con- troller until "Status" is selected and press the controller.
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if applicable, inspections required by law is dis- played.
You can request more detailed information on every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man- dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is always set correctly, refer to page 83, otherwise the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Ser- vice is not ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
C o
n tr
o ls
81
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu: Select and press the controller.
More information on the BMW Maintenance System can be found on page 229.
Clock The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the 12h/24h format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa- nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2. The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
82
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the controller forwards to move the highlight marker to the upper- most field.
6. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.
Adjusting settings 8. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
9. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.
The system accepts the new time.
Switching on the hour signal* You will hear three tones just before each full hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. The hour signal is activated.
Setting the 12h/24h format 1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Time format" and press the control- ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the controller.
Date The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on page 28.
C o
n tr
o ls
83
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer to Setting the date format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa- nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2. The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Date" and press the controller.
5. Select "Set date" and press the controller. The first date display setting is selected.
6. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.
8. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.
Setting the date format 1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Date format" and press the control- ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the controller.
Check Control
The concept The Check Control monitors vehicle functions and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys- tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes- sage includes indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster and, in some circum- stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes- sages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a variety of combinations and colors.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
84
indicates that Check Control messages have been stored. You can view the Check Control messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can view more information later, e.g. regarding the cause of a malfunction and how to respond, refer to page 85.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur at the same time, they are displayed in succes- sion.
They are marked with the symbol shown here.
Other messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.
They are marked with the symbol shown here.
Viewing stored Check Control messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the display, accompa- nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2. "CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check Control messages. If a Check Control message has been stored, the corresponding lamp comes on. It is accompanied by a text message on the Control Display.
C o
n tr
o ls
85
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2. The display again shows the outside tem- perature and the time.
Viewing more information later iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con- troller.
To exit the display: Select and press the controller.
Speed limit You can enter a speed, and a Check Control message will indicate when you reach this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Setting or changing the limit 1. Select speed value and press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the limit.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
E ve
ry th
in g
u nd
er c
o n
tr o
l
86
Applying your current speed as limit Select "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system adopts your current speed as the limit.
Activating the limit Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is activated.
Stopwatch iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- ler.
Starting, stopping or resetting > Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.
Taking an interim time reading Select "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation in the background.<
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display The language of the Control Display can be set. The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Language" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Text language" and press the con- troller. You can switch to another language for the display texts and navigation mes- sages.
6. Select and activate the desired language by pressing the controller.
Brightness of the Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. Note, however, that you can change the basic setting while the low beams are switched on. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
C o
n tr
o ls
87
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached.
T ec
h n
o lo
g y
fo r d
ri vi
n g
c o
m fo
rt a
n d
s af
et y
88
Technology for driving comfort and safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual indicatorwarn you of the presence of an object behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in either bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/ 2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth- erwise physical circumstances may lead to the system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec- ond when you engage reverse gear or move the automatic transmission selector lever to position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or above approx. 20 mph/approx. 30 km/h, the system switches off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones When nearing an object, its position is indicated correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis- tance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin- uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds
> if you remain in front of an object that has been detected by only one of the corner sensors
> if you are driving parallel to a wall.
Malfunction The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc- tioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the sensors for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning You can also have the system show distances to objects on the Control Display. The contours of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis- play even before the acoustic signal sounds. The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
C o
n tr
o ls
89
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
until "PDC" is selected and press the con- troller.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con- troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display is shown on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are pro- vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can no longer be detected. The system is also sub- ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultrasonic measurement, such as those encountered with trailer towbars and hitches, thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage. Loud sound sources outside or inside the car can drown out the PDC signal.<
Driving stability control systems Your BMW has a number of systems that help to maintain the vehicle's stability even in adverse driving conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during full braking. Active safety is thus increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the engine. Braking safely, refer to page 126.
Electronic brake-force distribution The system controls the brake pressure in the rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
DBC Dynamic Brake Control When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro- vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the duration of the full braking application.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing traction when you pull away from rest or accel- erate. The system also recognizes unstable driving conditions, for example if the rear of the car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle past the front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe course within physical limits by reducing engine output and through braking actions at the indi- vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin again by taking risks, as this could result in an accident.<
T ec
h n
o lo
g y
fo r d
ri vi
n g
c o
m fo
rt a
n d
s af
et y
90
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi- cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and DSC have been simultaneously deactivated. Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions are no longer executed.
328i, 335i: in the same way as with a differential interlock, even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are still performed on the rear axle to enhance drive output if the drive wheels experi- ence a significant loss of traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible.
Activating DSC Press the button again; the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
For better control If the indicator lamp flashes: DSC controls the drive forces and brake forces.
If the indicator lamps are on: DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out- put is optimized for particular road conditions, e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys- tem assures the maximal drive output, but with reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces- sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads, in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start- ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC in the instrument cluster come on.
For better control If the indicator lamp flashes: DTC controls the drive forces and brake forces.
If the indicator lamps are on: DTC has been activated.
Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
xDrive* xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system. The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes driving power variably to the front and rear axles depending on the driving situation and road conditions.
HDC Hill Descent Control* HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls your speed on steep downhill gradients and makes it even easier to control your BMW's handling under these conditions. The vehicle
C o
n tr
o ls
91
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
then moves slightly faster than double walking speed without the driver needing to intervene.
HDC can be activated as long as you are driving under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically reduced to slightly more than double walking speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed By accelerating or braking you can change this speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph, approx. 5 to 25 km/h. You can specify a target speed within the same range using the cruise control* lever on the steering column.
1 To increase speed
2 To decrease speed
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up. When the vehicle is being braked automatically, the LED flashes.
Deactivating HDC Press the button again; the LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated in the follow- ing situations:
> At speeds above approx. 40 mph or 60 km/h
> After switching off the ignition.
Using HDC In cars with manual transmission: Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.
With automatic transmission: You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster*
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction The HDC display disappears during HDC oper- ation, or does not appear: HDC is temporarily unavailable due to exces- sive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
Drive-off assistant The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off assistant will no longer hold the car in place
T ec
h n
o lo
g y
fo r d
ri vi
n g
c o
m fo
rt a
n d
s af
et y
92
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the individual tires while moving.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum- ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed of the affected wheel. This change is detected and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be initialized for the cor- rect tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<
System limitations The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of time.<
In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system The initialization is completed during driv- ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con- tinued automatically. Do not initialize the system while snow chains are attached.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the con- troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive. Initialization is completed while the car is on the move, without any feedback.
C o
n tr
o ls
93
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Indication of a flat tire The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run- Flat Tires, refer to page 222, the stan-
dard equipment by design, do not continue driving. Otherwise a severe accident could result if you continue driving.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres- sure in all four tires.
If all four tires are inflated to the cor- rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor
might not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:
> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 90 miles/150 km
> With a full load or when towing a trailer: 4 persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident. In the event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a
suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do not continue driving. Instead, contact your BMW center.<
Malfunction The warning lamps come on in yel- low. A message appears on the Con- trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has a malfunction or has failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four mounted tires. The system notifies you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla- tion pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth- erwise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud- den severe tire damage caused by out-
side influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi- cated even though the tire inflation pressures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as a compact spare wheel, has been mounted, or if TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio fre- quency.
T ec
h n
o lo
g y
fo r d
ri vi
n g
c o
m fo
rt a
n d
s af
et y
94
Status indicator on the Control Display The color of the tires represents the status of the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures change while the vehicle is being driven. The tire pressures do not need to be corrected unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means of color indicators.
Green The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel yellow There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres- sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.
All wheels yellow There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres- sure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.
Gray The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting the system Each time a tire inflation pressure has been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "TPM" is selected and press the con- troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation pressures in the tires are accepted as the target values to be monitored. The system reset is completed during your drive, and can be inter-
will be adapted
will be adapted
C o
n tr
o ls
95
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the reset is continued automatically. On the Control Display, the tires are shown in green and "Sta- tus: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is resetting and determining the inflation
pressures, all tires on the Control Display are displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure The warning lamps come on in yellow and red. A message appears on the Control Display. In addition, a signal sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-
tial loss of tire pressure.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run- Flat Tires, refer to page 222, the stan-
dard equipment by design, do not continue driving. Otherwise a severe accident could result after a tire puncture if you continue driving.<
2. In the event of complete pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guidelines:
> With a light load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load: 4 persons, cargo bay full: approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distance and altered natural steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during the journey, this may be an indication that the damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your speed and pull over as soon as possible at a suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do not continue driving. Instead, contact your BMW center.<
Malfunction The small warning lamp flashes in yellow and then lights up continu- ously; the larger warning lamp comes on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the tires are shown in gray and a message appears. No punctures can be detected.
This type of message is shown in the following situations:
> If there is a malfunction Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has been mounted
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other systems or devices using the same radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message will appear on the Control Display. The system is not reset after a tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the system, refer to page 94.
Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
T ec
h n
o lo
g y
fo r d
ri vi
n g
c o
m fo
rt a
n d
s af
et y
96
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are signif- icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles han- dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin- flation has not reached the level at which the TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys- tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously lit. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept Active steering varies the turning angle of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel move- ments. It also varies the steering force required to turn the wheels depending on the speed at which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low road-speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer- ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct, and less effort is required to turn the wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing intervention is simultaneously deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 90.
Malfunction The warning lamps come on. Active steering is no longer operational. At low speeds, greater steering wheel movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi- tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil- ity-enhancing feature may also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think well ahead. Have the system checked.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking
On the right: sharp braking
C o
n tr
o ls
97
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags, front and rear
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
Protective action Observe the adjustment instructions on page 45 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig- gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe- cifically approved for seats with integral side air- bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets over the back- rests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag retention system from the vehicle. Do not mod- ify the individual components of the system or its wiring in any way. This includes the uphol- stered covers on the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides
of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components imme- diately after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air- bag generators executed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to repair procedures of BMW with correspondingly trained personnel and that has the required explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to work on the system could lead to failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag activation, either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air- bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags An analysis of the impression in the front pas- senger seat cushion determines whether and how the seat is occupied. The front and side air- bags for the front passenger are activated or deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or activated, refer to Status of front passenger air- bags below.
Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 56.
T ec
h n
o lo
g y
fo r d
ri vi
n g
c o
m fo
rt a
n d
s af
et y
98
The front and side airbags can also be deacti- vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer- tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the passenger should change his or her sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired airbag status cannot be achieved by changing the sitting position, transport the rele- vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not place any items under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Other- wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags shows the functional status of the front passenger's front and side airbags in accor- dance with whether and how the front passen- ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are acti- vated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a specially designated child-restraint sys- tem is detected, as intended, on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi- cle production. After mounting a child seat, ensure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the front passenger airbags are deactivated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on as long as a person of sufficient size and in a correct sitting position is detected on the seat. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the seat is empty. The front and side airbags for the front pas- senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 59, the warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are operational.
Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system, have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci- dent occurs.<
Convertible: rollover protection system The rollover protection system is activated automatically in the event of an accident, a crit- ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
C o
n tr
o ls
99
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The protection bars behind the rear head restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced windshield frame, the rollover protection sys- tem ensures that the necessary headroom is maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on acci- dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting If the rollover protection system was not impacted after being automatically activated, it can be reset by lowering the protection bars to their original positions. This does not require tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps into place.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec- tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked after an unexpected activation.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the rollover protection system is in the
activated position. Do not make any modifications to the individual components of the rollover protection system or its cabling. Work on the rollover protection system should only be performed by a BMW center. Incorrectly performed work on the system may lead to system failure or incorrect operation. To check the system and ensure flawless long- term operation, always observe the service intervals, refer to page 79.<
L am
p s
100
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off, daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control*, daytime run- ning lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive Head Light*
When you open the driver's door with the igni- tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto- matically switched off if the light switch is in position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary, switch position 1.
Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the left- hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps, refer to page 102.<
Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control* When the switch is in position 3, the low beams are switched on and off automatically depend- ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap- tive Head Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on. You can also activate the daytime running lamps, refer to page 101. In the situations described above, the lamps then automatically switch from daytime running lamps to low beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on inde- pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the system cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low-beam headlamps manually under these conditions.<
Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when you park the car, the parking lamps and the interior lamps light up briefly when you unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome lamps iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
C o
n tr
o ls
101
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con- troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Pathway lighting If you activate the headlamp flasher after park- ing the car, with the lights switched off, the low beams come on and remain on for a certain time.
You can adjust the operating period or deacti- vate the function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the corre- sponding duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Daytime running lamps The daytime running lamps light up in switch position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press the controller.
The daytime running lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination
L am
p s
102
of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h, e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Head Light With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch to position 3, refer to page 100. The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on automatically, depending on the steering wheel angle or turn signal indicator.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light directs light towards the front pas- senger side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi- nating lamps are active and switched on on both sides.
Malfunction The LED next to the symbol for automatic head- lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right* There is an additional option of switching on the lamps on the side of the car facing the road when parked.
Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the pressure point for a longer period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat- tery might not have enough power to start the engine.<
Switching off Press the lever in the opposite direction to the pressure point, arrow 3.
Fog lamps
The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on for the fog lamps to operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti- vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
C o
n tr
o ls
103
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Instrument lighting You can adjust the brightness of the instrument lighting only when the parking lamps or the low beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol appears in the dis- play, accompanied by the brightness set- ting and scale the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. The display again shows the outside tem- perature and the time.
Interior lamps The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps*, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps* are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lampsare set in the door handles and illuminate the ground in front of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer to Start/stop button on page 59.<
Switching interior lamps on/off manually
Interior lamps, front and rear*: To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell lamps*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* per- manently, press the button for the front interior lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear*, next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off, press the button.
C lim
at e
104
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area Draft-free ventilation 107
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/ Recirculated-air mode
10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side of passenger compartment
11 Residual heat
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden- sation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window defroster
15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is dis- played on the Control Display, refer to page 105.
C o
n tr
o ls
105
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. All you need to do is select an interior temperature which is comfort- able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile settings on page 28.
Adjusting air distribution manually The air distribution can be switched on and off manually. The air is directed to the windshield, to the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment is deactivated.
You can switch the automatic air distribution back on by pressing the AUTO button. This automatically switches on the cooling function as well.
Fine adjustments to manual air distribution You can set the rate of incoming airflow for manual air distribution.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller.
4. Select the desired field.
5. Turn the controller to set the air distribution.
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to the footwell
Temperature Set the desired temperatures indi- vidually for the driver's and front passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi- ble regardless of the season, using maximum cooling or heating power if necessary, and then maintains it.
When you switch between different tem- perature settings in quick succession, the
automatic climate control does not have enough time to achieve the set temperature.<
You can achieve maximum heating power with the highest setting, regardless of the outside temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
C lim
at e
106
Maximum cooling At outside temperatures above 327/06 and when the engine is running, you obtain a maximum cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recir- culated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air flows at maximum rate from the vents for the upper body area. You should therefore open them for maximum cooling.
AUTO program The AUTO program adjusts the air distribution to the windshield and side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air flow rate and your temperature specifications will be adapted to outside influences as a result of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the intensity of the AUTO program. The current setting is briefly displayed on the Control Dis- play every time the button is pressed.
You can also set the intensity of the AUTO pro- gram via iDrive.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto- matic program is switched on.
Convertible program When the hardtop is open, the Convertible pro- gram is selectable as well. In the Convertible program, the automatic climate control is opti- mized for driving with the hardtop open. In addi- tion, the air flow rate is increased as vehicle speed increases.
When the Convertible program has been selected, it is automatically activated every time the hardtop is opened.
The effectiveness of the Convertible pro- gram can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air flow rate manually Press the left side of the button to reduce airflow. Press the right side of the button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower may be switched off entirely to save on battery power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off With the blower at its lowest setting, press the left side of the button to switch off the auto- matic climate control. All displays are cleared except for the rear window defroster if it is switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window defroster to reactivate the automatic climate control.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating mode by pressing this button repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
C o
n tr
o ls
107
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec- essary, the system blocks the supply of out- side air and recirculates the inside air. As soon as the concentration of pollutants in the outside air has decreased sufficiently, the system automatically switches back to outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air is permanently shut off. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch it off while also increasing the air flow rate as required. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over an extended period of time, otherwise the air quality inside the car will deteriorate contin- uously.<
Via the button* on the steering wheel You can switch quickly between the recircu- lated-air mode and the previous mode using an individually programmable buttonon the steer- ing wheel, refer to page 11.
Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com- partment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol- lowing conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been switched off
> While the engine is at operating tempera- ture
> As long as battery voltage is sufficient
> At an outside temperature below 777/ 256
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri- bution.
Defrosting windows and removing condensation
Quickly removes ice and conden- sation from the windshield and front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Switching cooling function on/off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting. This function is only available while the engine is running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa- tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is automatically switched on along with the AUTO program.
Rear window defroster The defroster is switched off auto- matically after a certain time. Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow
3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from the vents for the upper body area
C lim
at e
108
Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance if it has become too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and not straight at you.
Ventilation in the rear
1 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temper- ature
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
2 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open and close the air vents
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro- vides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen- ter replaces this combined filter during routine maintenance.
Parked car ventilation
The concept The parked car ventilation provides ventilation to the passenger compartment and lowers its temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on for 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times can be preselected. The system can also be switched on and off directly. Due to its high power consumption, it should not be switched on twice in a row without driv- ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper body area in the instrument panel. The air vents must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.
The parked car ventilation is switched on. The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.
C o
n tr
o ls
109
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con- troller.
5. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller. The first time setting is selected.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating switch-on times Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con- troller.
The switch-on time is activated. The symbol on the automatic climate control
display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control display flashes when the system has switched on.
The respective system is switched on within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
110
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote control*
The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled devices, such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys- tems. The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans- mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to delete the stored programs beforehand for your safety, refer to page 111.
To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or travel range of the device being operated. Com- ply also with the safety instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility If this symbol appears on the package or in the instructions supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will be compatible with the integrated universal remote control.
For additional information, please contact your BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515. You can also obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 59.
2. When starting operation for the first time: Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec- onds, alter the distance and repeat this step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
C o
n tr
o ls
111
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is switched off.
If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly and then remains lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If it uses an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described under Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the device to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in the section Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the device to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap- idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs 1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the respective original hand-held transmitter used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the transmit key of the original hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat this step.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
112
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle You can call up various functions by pressing the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following adjustment options are displayed one after the other, depending on how long you keep the adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones Set the compass zone corresponding to your vehicle's geographic location so that the com- pass can function correctly; refer to the world map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the adjustment button repeatedly until the display shows the number of the compass zone corre- sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx. 10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass The digital compass must be calibrated in the following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
C o
n tr
o ls
113
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> The compass direction shown does not change although the direction of travel does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure 1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least one full circle at a speed of no more than 4 mph or 7 km/h. If calibration is successful, the display changes from C to a compass direction.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering Your digital compass is factory-set to right- hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with your vehicle.
Setting the language You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx. 12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment button again to switch between English, "E", and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx. 10 seconds.
Coupe: Roller sun blind*
Tap the button in the center console to raise or lower the roller sun blind.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after use.<
Closing Fold cover up.
Locking To lock the glove compartment, use the inte- grated key of the remote control, refer to page 28.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the outside, the glove compartment is locked as well.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
114
LED hand lamp In a holder on the left side of the glove compart- ment.
Insert the hand lamp into the holder with the lens pointing toward the passenger
compartment to ensure that the lamp cannot be switched on accidentally.<
Center armrest
Storage compartment The center armrest between the front seats contains either a compartment or the cover for the snap-in adapter*, depending on the equip- ment version. For more information about this mobile phone base plate refer to the separate Owner's Manual.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the outside, the center armrest is locked as well.
Opening Press the button, see arrow.
Ventilated storage compartment
The storage compartment in the center armrest can be ventilated: slide the switch backwards.
The temperature is controlled via the knurled wheel for adjusting the temperature of air venti- lating the rear of the passenger compartment, refer to page 108.
Connection for external audio device You can connect an external audio device such as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-In port, refer to page 179
> USB-audio interface*, refer to page 180
Storage compartments inside the vehicle Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you will find compartments beside the steering col- umn*, in the front doors and in the center con- sole*. There are netson the front-seat backrests.
Storage compartments in the rear console Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver- sion, the following storage compartments can be found in the rear console:
C o
n tr
o ls
115
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
> Storage tray
> Storage compartment with cover
> Cup holders
Coupe: clothes hooks
Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other- wise they could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv- ing.<
Cup holders Use lightweight and shatterproof contain- ers and do not transport hot beverages,
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in the event of the accident. Do not force contain- ers that are too large into the cup holders, oth- erwise damage could result.<
Front
Opening Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing Briefly press the cover in the center and push in the cup holder.
Coupe: rear There are two additional cup holders in the rear center armrest.
Press the front of the armrest.
Convertible: rear There are two additional cup holders in the rear console.
Press the button to open.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
116
Before folding down the rear seat back- rest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cup holder and close it. Do not place objects into the cup holder and use force to close it. Do not use the cup holder as a grab handle.<
Ashtray, front
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns. When leaving the car, always remove the remote control so that children cannot operate the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Ashtray, rear
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying Lift out the insert.
Connecting electrical appliances In your BMW, when the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, you can use electrical devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at 12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape or size.
Cigarette lighter socket* To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter out of the socket.
Socket in the center armrest External audio device, refer to page 114.
C o
n tr
o ls
117
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Coupe: socket in the cargo bay*
Open the cap.
Coupe: Through-loading system*
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for- ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by the head restraint.
Closing Return the rear seat backrest to its upright posi- tion and engage it.
When returning the backrest into its seat- ing position, make sure that the seat's
locking mechanism engages properly. Other- wise, cargo could be thrown around in the event of sharp braking or swerving and endanger the occupants.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you with a way to attach cargo bay nets* or draw straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer to page 128.
Convertible: Cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo bay
When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the cargo bay: To do so, push the cargo bay partition upward.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo bay partition down until it engages on both sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that there are no objects on or next to the
cargo bay partition, otherwise parts of the hard- top may be damaged. Do not exceed the maxi- mum loading height; refer to the sticker in the cargo bay showing a line indicating the maxi- mum height. Do not use force to push down the cargo bay partition.<
The retractable hardtop can only be opened if the cargo bay partition is in its
lowermost position and engaged on both sides.<
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
118
Folding down the rear seat backrest
You can fold down the rear seat backrest to transport light objects in the rear without dam- aging the seats. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mounting points for the cargo bay net* are found on the back of the seat back- rest. To unlock the rear seat backrest: press the button on the driver's or the opposite side.
Bag holder*
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you will find two bag holders on the cargo bay wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the but- ton.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other suitable objects from the holders, other-
wise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead to a safety hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compartment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo bay if it has been appropriately secured.<
For more information on loading the vehicle, refer to page 127.
Storage compartment behind the rear seat backrest
A storage compartment is located behind the rear seat backrest. To access the storage com- partment: remove the insert or fold down the rear seat backrest.
When the rear seat backrest is folded down or the insert has been removed,
only transport small light objects in the storage compartment, otherwise braking maneuvers and swerving may lead to a safety hazard due to objects flying about the passenger compart- ment. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo bay if it has been appropriately secured.<
Storage compartments inside the cargo bay
Coupe Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack- ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver- sion
> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for securing small objects such as a folding umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel of the cargo bay
C o
n tr
o ls
119
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Convertible Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the following storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:
> Storage compartment on the left side of the cargo bay. To open turn handle by 90
> Net* for securing smaller objects, to be attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Rubber band* to be attached to the lateral lashing eyes
> Stowage compartment under the floor panel
Folding up the floor panel Do not exceed the maximum permissible load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-
partment under the floor panel, otherwise dam- age could result.<
Coupe Press the floor panel up and secure it with the catch.
Convertible To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the open- ing at the rear of the panel.
Lashing eyes You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for securing luggage items with nets or tensioning straps, refer to page 128.
Coupe: ski bag* The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6 ft 10 in/ 2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading 1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and fold down the cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski bag between the front seats and insert the skis or snowboards. The zip fastener makes objects in the ski bag easier to reach.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap into the eyelet.
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten- sioning buckle for this purpose.
P ra
ct ic
al in
te ri
o r a
cc es
so ri
es
120
Secure the ski bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Convertible: through-loading opening with integrated transport bag* The transport bag is designed for safe, clean transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you can remove the insert and use the transport bag with the regular through-loading opening. To transport larger objects, you can fold down the rear seat backrest to create an expanded through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a length of up to 6 ft 2 in/1.90 m. When skis of 6 ft 2 in/1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capac- ity of the transport bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading 1. For loading using the regular through-load-
ing opening: Press the button down and remove the insert from the front. For loading with the through-loading open- ing expanded: Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to page 118.
2. Front cover: press the two recesses together and fold the cover down until it engages.
3. In the cargo bay: press the two recesses together and fold down the cover.
4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out the transport bag between the front seats.
C o
n tr
o ls
121
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap into the belt buckle under the transport bag.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport bag if you do not need its full length.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak- ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the front cover
You can remove the front cover to use the full height of the through-loading opening. With the cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow, and remove the cover toward the front. To replace, insert the cover at an angle from above and let it snap it into place.
Driving tips This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and operating conditions.
T h
in g
s to
re m
em b
er w
h en
d ri
vi n
g
124
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to each other. Please follow the instructions below in order to achieve the optimal service life and economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do not exceed an engine speed of 4500 rpm or a road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually increased.
Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in period.
Clutch The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on several factors. You can lower fuel consump- tion and the environmental impact by taking certain measures, adjusting your driving style and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you have finished using them Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof rack and the rear luggage rack after use. Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam- ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof An open glass roof or window causes higher air resistance and thus increases fuel consump- tion.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before embarking on a long journey, and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling resistance and thus increases fuel consumption and tire wear.
Set off immediately Do not let the engine warm up while the car is still standing, but set off immediately at moder- ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
125
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Drive defensively Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis- tance to the forward vehicle. A defensive and smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds Only use first gear when setting off. In second and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the engine speed as low as possible and at a con- stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high- est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel- erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy stops Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav- ings even if standing time is as short as approx. 4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at the moment Functions such as the air conditioner and the seat or rear window heating draw large amounts of power and consume additional fuel. Espe- cially in city traffic and in stop and go driving they have a considerable impact. Therefore, switch these functions off when they are not really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW recommends having the vehicle serviced at a BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys- tem, refer to page 229.
General driving notes
Close the luggage compartment lid Operate the vehicle only when the lug- gage compartment lid is closed. Other-
wise, exhaust fumes could enter the interior of the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage compartment lid open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto- matic climate control system, refer to page 106.
Hot exhaust system In all vehicles, extremely high tempera- tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys- tem, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while park- ing, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the risk of serious personal injuries and property damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This situation, known as hydroplaning, means that the tire can completely lose contact with the road surface, so that neither the car can be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
T h
in g
s to
re m
em b
er w
h en
d ri
vi n
g
126
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin- ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini- mum tread depth on page 221.
Driving through water Drive through water on the road only if it is not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis- tant, refer to page 91.
Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations in which this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions When roads are wet or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.
Hills To prevent overheating and the resulting reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Even light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces- sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. Down- shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans- mission, refer to page 62.
Never drive with the clutch held down, with the transmission in idle or with the
engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking action will not be present or there will be no power assistance to the brakes or steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area around the pedals, otherwise pedal function could be impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.
When the vehicle is parked Condensation forms while the automatic cli- mate control is in operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash For general information about taking care of your BMW, refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
127
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
With convenient access and automatic transmission Insert the remote control into the ignition switch. The engine can be switched off when the selec- tor lever is in position N. Refer also to page 37.
Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This can ultimately result in a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or leak from their containers in the cargo
bay, as this could result in damage to the vehi- cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:
The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading can result in damage to the vehicle and unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs: 1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug- gage can be transported.
Stowing cargo > Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each safety belt in the opposite buckle.
T h
in g
s to
re m
em b
er w
h en
d ri
vi n
g
128
Coupe
Convertible
Securing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
> Secure smaller and lighter items using retaining straps, a cargo bay net* or draw straps*.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are provided for attaching the cargo straps. Two are locatedon the cargo bay sidewalls 1, two moreare on the rear cargo bay panel 2. Please comply with the information sup- plied with the cargo straps.
Convertible: before opening the hardtop, fold down the cargo bay partition. Make
sure the cargo bay is loaded correctly, other- wise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer to page 117.<
Always position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden braking or swerving is necessary. Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 247, as excessive loads can pose a
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
129
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola- tion of traffic safety laws. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car, since they could be thrown around, for example as a result of heavy braking, sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu- pants.<
Coupe: roof-mounted luggage rack* A special rack system is available as an option for your BMW. Comply with the directions given in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. You should therefore always remember not to exceed the approved roof load capacity, the approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights on page 247.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and should not be too large in area. Heavy items should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for rais- ing the glass roof, and that objects do not project into the opening path of the luggage compartment lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Navigation This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
S ta
rt in
g th
e na
vi g
at io
n sy
st em
132
Starting the navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.
Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi- gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up. The navigation DVD is pulled in automati- cally.
2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con- tents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD 1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be blocked. In this case, a message will appear on the Control Display.
Display in the assistance window You can display the route or the current position in the assistance window. This display remains visible even if you change to another applica- tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the assistance window.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current position".
4. Press the controller.
Displaying arrow display in map view* When the navigation system suggests a change in direction, the arrow display appears briefly.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
*
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
133
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions" and press the controller.
The arrow view is displayed in the assis- tance window.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
134
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination by voice com- mands*, refer to page 138
> Selecting destination using information, refer to page 140
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 141
> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 142
> Selecting home address, refer to page 144
After selecting your destination you can pro- ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 147.
You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and other road users may be endangered.<
Opening navigation iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
The following is displayed on the Control Dis- play:
> The arrow or map view during destination guidance
> The destination list when destination guid- ance is switched off
Entering a destination manually The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 146. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
135
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller. "New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.
The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local- ity if the current entries should be retained for your new destination.
Selecting country 1. Select "State / Province" or the country dis-
played and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press the controller.
At least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered in order to start the des- tination guidance.
Entering destination by town/city name 1. Select "Town / City" or the town/city dis-
played and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press the con- troller. A list of all towns/cities starting with this let- ter appears on the Control Display.
3. Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller towards the right to select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller for a longer period.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
136
4. If necessary, enter more letters. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.
> To enter spaces, if necessary: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the control- ler until the city or town name is selected from the list and press the controller.
Entering destination by zip code 1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.
> To enter spaces: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
> To delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller towards the right to select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select , and press the controller for a longer period.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller. The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the con- troller.
Entering street, house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec- tion or the house number.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
137
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street. The street is entered in the same manner as the town or city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.
Entering a street without entering a town/city You can also enter a street without specifying a town/city. In this case, all streets of the same name in the designated country are offered. The corresponding town/city is displayed after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can negate this entry. This could be helpful in instances where the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city because it belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until you see a request to enter a street in the country, then press the controller.
3. Switch to the second field from the top and enter the street.
Entering a house number You can enter any house number stored for the street on the navigation DVD.
1. Select "House number" and press the con- troller.
2. To enter the house number: Select the desired digits and press the con- troller.
3. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.
Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller. Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If you do not want to start destination guid- ance right away: Select "Add to destination list" and press
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
138
the controller. The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 141.
Entering a destination by voice commands* You can enter a desired destination via the voice command system. During the destination input, you can switch between voice entry and entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate the voice command system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands read aloud via {Options}.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel or in the center console.
Selecting country 1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the destination country in the language of the voice command system.
Entering a destination The destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.
Spelling the destination To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is commonly spelled in the destination country. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina- tions that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries at a time appear on the Control Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire word* The names of towns/cities and streets located in the region in which the language of the voice command system is spoken can be entered as an entire word.
Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire word, the system language must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the destination coun- try.
1. To spell the name of a town/city: Say at least the first three letters of the town/city. The more letters you say, the more accurately the system will recog- nize the town/city.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries in the list: {Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
139
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina- tions that fit your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the destination is selected and press the controller.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can- not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a des- tination followed by three dots. If applicable, select this entry with {Yes}. Then select the desired town/city from that list.<
Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the destination town/city.
To enter the house number:
House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered. Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations Destinations are added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.
Map-guided destination selection If you only know the location of the town or street of destination, you can enter the destina- tion using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to select the destination on the map and then transfer it for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler. "New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
2. Say the name of the destination town/ city.
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city: {Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To re-enter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling: {Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or {Add to address book}
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
140
A section of a map is displayed on the Con- trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti- vated, around the last destination entered
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To move the map: move the controller in the desired direction. The controller can be moved to the left, right, forwards and backwards.
5. Press the controller to transfer the destina- tion for destination guidance or to store it. The selected destination and other menu items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.
> "Show current position" places your current position at the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the current destination at the center of the map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for destination entry can also be called up in the map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using information You can have a list of selected destinations dis- played, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and transfer them for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control- ler.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
141
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res- taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the maximum distance from your location.
7. Select "
8. Select a destination and press the control- ler.
The scope of information and sym- bols depends on the particular navi-
gation DVD you are using.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destina- tion list and start destination guidance:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
> To establish a telephone connection: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
> To display additional destinations: Select the symbol and press the controller.
> To start a new search: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in the map display If you select the hotel category, for example, and start a search, hotels appear on the map as symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map display:
1. Select the symbol and press the control- ler.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con- troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols: Select "Show map icons" and press the con- troller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list The last 20 destinations entered into the sys- tem are shown in the destination list. You can call up these destinations and transfer them for
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
142
destination guidance. If you are planning a longer journey, for exam- ple, you can store all the destinations you wish to drive to in the destination list in advance, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 134.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The destination last entered is listed first in the destination list.
This symbol identifies the current destina- tion during destination guidance.
To show other destinations in the destination list: Turn the controller.
Transferring destination for destination guidance 1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.
Editing destination list 1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> To store the entry: Select "Add to address book".
> To display information on the destina- tion: Select "Information on destination".
> To delete the entry: Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries: Select "Delete list". The destination guidance is switched off.
> To change an entry: Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination by town/city name, page 135.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
143
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con- troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.
4. Enter the name and address, refer also to Entering a destination manually, page 134.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller. The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti- nation list in the address book, refer to page 141.
Storing current position* The current position can be transferred to the address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New address" is selected and press the control- ler.
3. Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller. The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu- ally, page 134.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
You can also enter your current position into the address book if you have left the area covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller. The stored entries appear on the Control Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start destination guidance: Select "Start guidance" and press the control- ler.
Changing destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
144
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller.
4. Change entry. For operation, refer to Entering a destina- tion manually, page 134.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con- troller.
Deleting all destinations from address book 1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Delete data" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Home address You can store your current position or the cur- rent destination as the home address in the address book. This entry occupies the second position in the address book.
Storing home address 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Home address" is selected and press the controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address" or "Save current destination" during destina- tion guidance and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
145
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Using home address as destination 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.
Changing home address 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 134.
Route selection You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like during des- tination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules. The type of road is taken into account, e.g. whether it is a highway or a winding road. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the navi- gation system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal experience.
Changing route criteria 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.
The various criteria are shown on the Con- trol Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways" Highways and major traffic arteries are given priority.
> "Avoid highways" Highways are avoided as far as possible.
> "Fast route" Fast route, being a combination of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads
> "Short route" Short route, irrespective of how fast or slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri- terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route" Automatic rerouting due to traffic obstructions. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the guided route may lead through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads" Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Avoid ferries" Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map display.
D es
ti n
at io
n e
n tr
y
146
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con- troller.
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider- ably longer.<
Word-matching principle The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of towns or streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com- paring your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The benefits for you include:
> Names of towns entered may differ from the official versions if you are using a spelling that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "Mnchen" you can also enter the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns and streets the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous identifica- tion.
> The system offers only those letters for selection of name entries that are stored on the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of errone- ous or unregistered names is impossible.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
147
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Destination guidance
Starting destination guidance
Via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.
2. Select the destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new destination, refer to page 134.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis- play on the Control Display.
Destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment items at any time via iDrive. You will be notified in time of any necessary
change of direction by means of spoken instructions and the display of the direction arrows.
Via programmable memory keys ... Press the key on which the
desired destination has been stored, refer also to page 21.
Terminating/continuing destination guidance
In the arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In the destination list This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the controller.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
148
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con- troller.
If you did not reach the destination before the end of the last journey, the following question will appear in the display at the start of the next journey: "Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately: Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Route display You can have the route during destination guid- ance displayed in various ways.
From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.<
Arrow display 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until
"Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Selecting route criteria
3 Starting/stopping destination guidance
4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current location
7 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route
> Solid arrow: Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal- culated route whenever the vehicle is not in an area recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.
The arrows change appearance before a change of direction.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
149
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Map display You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map display is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa- tion last selected can be shown/hidden, refer to Selecting destination using infor- mation, page 140
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information* manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the destination is displayed in the bottom line of the Control Display.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you can have the map shown facing north or toward your current direction of travel, or in perspec- tive. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map is always north-oriented.
Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller. The next map display is displayed.
Changing scale Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
150
Displaying towns/cities and streets along the route You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled within each section of the route are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the con- troller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off during the destination guidance in the arrow or map display: Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any time:
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
151
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Repeating or canceling voice instructions With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel, you can also execute the following func- tions, refer to page 54:
> Repeat the voice instruction: Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button for a longer period.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions The volume can be adjusted only while a voice instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Changing a route During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the route: Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information* In many metropolitan areas you can receive traffic information broadcast by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic control centers and the traffic information is updated periodically. During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation relevant to the route you are planning to take is automatically shown and taken into account in route planning. Whether destination guidance is active or not, you can have the traf- fic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic information on/off iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
152
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.
The traffic information can be received and displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the best reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta- tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Calling up traffic information manually
During destination guidance During destination guidance, traffic information can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf- fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, traffic information items along the planned route are indicated by yellow diamonds.
Traffic information on the planned route is shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi- cle's current position.
With destination guidance switched off 1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
153
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.
Traffic information on the planned route is shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi- cle's current position.
Displaying traffic information in map display The traffic information icons are shown in the map display up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
The highlighting of the stretch corresponding to the traffic report and the icons for the type of event as described below are displayed and hidden. This depends on the selected scale.
Displaying detailed traffic information Select a traffic information item from the list and press the controller.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
D es
ti n
at io
n g
u id
an ce
154
Traffic information icons
Traffic information during destination guidance System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected, refer to page 145.
Displaying traffic obstructions When the navigation system receives a traffic obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is not selected, you are shown certain informa- tion, such as the length of the traffic congestion, when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away from the traffic obstruction. The last possible detour exit is indicated just before you reach it.
Traffic event displayed with map scales larger than 5 miles/10 km; arrow points in relevant direction of travel
There are several traffic events. Switch to a smaller map scale to show more detail.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load Vehicle on wrong carriageway
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic backup
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop and go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic events in both directions of travel
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
155
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
This information is displayed even if you have called up another application on the Control Display.
Dynamic route planning When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system does not point out traffic obstructions on the original route. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route may lead through the traffic obstruction.
Displaying current position You can have your current position displayed even when the destination guidance is switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Cur- rent position" is selected and press the controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis- played on a map, refer to page 149.
W h
at to
d o
if
156
What to do if
What to do if
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc- tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con- trol Display? The navigation DVD may not be the correct DVD for the navigation system. This infor- mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- play? The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your current position is not yet available on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your current position. As a rule, reception is guaranteed when you are in the open.
> the destination guidance does not accept a destination? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a destination as close as possible to the orig- inal one.
> the destination guidance does not accept an address without the street name? On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station in the selected town, and then start the destination guid- ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des- tination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any let- ters to choose from. Choose a destination as close as possible to the original one.
> the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec- tions? You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
157
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Entertainment Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone settings are described in this chapter.
O n
/o ff
a n
d s
et ti
n g
s
160
On/off and settings
The following audio sources have shared con- trols and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer*
Controls The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttonson the steering wheel, refer to page 11
> Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21
Buttons on the CD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol- ume
> Press: switch on/off. When you switch on the unit, the last set radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD.
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVD
Operation via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "SAT": satellite radio* > "CD": CD player or changer
> "AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
> "Set": depending on the audio source, other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sam- ple stations.
From another menu, you can switch directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on page 18.<
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off In order to switch the entertainment sound out- put on and off: Press button 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi- cates that sound output is switched off.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
161
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass or the speed-dependent volume increase. The tone settings are applied to all audio sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Changing tone settings 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected if you have called up "Entertainment" in the start menu: Select "Set" and then "Tone", pressing the controller after each selection.
Treble and bass 1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Balance and fader You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control The speed-dependent volume control auto- matically increases the volume with increasing driving speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.
O n
/o ff
a n
d s
et ti
n g
s
162
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- troller.
2. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System* You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To switch off the spatial sound effect: Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.
Individual High-End Audio System* You can choose between stereo and multichan- nel playback, surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
Equalizer* You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
163
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.
Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default setting.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Reset" is selected and press the con- troller.
6. In vehicles equipped with two drives: Select "Yes" and press the controller.
R ad
io
164
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.
Listening to the radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre- sets".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM waveband or if the displayed stations are no longer receivable, update the stations with the best reception, refer to page 165.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on the CD player Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction. The system switches to the next displayed sta- tion. You can also change the station with the but- tons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection criteria:
> "All stations"*: Stations that can currently be received on the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore": Stations with the best reception on the "AM" waveband. For High Definition Radio: stations with the best reception on the "FM" waveband.
> "Presets": Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 166.
> "Manual": To set stations that can be received in addi- tion to those already being displayed, refer to Selecting the frequency manually, page 165.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
165
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
To change the selection criterion:
1. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
2. Choose a selection criterion and press the controller.
Sampling stations, Scan The stations on the current waveband are auto- matically sampled in succession.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler. "Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Station sampling is interrupted and the selected station stays on.
Buttons on the CD player To sample stations, press the but-
ton for the corresponding direction for an extended time.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting the frequency manually With "Manual" you can select stations that can be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre- quency.
Updating stations with best reception If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals in the AM waveband.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
R ad
io
166
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest reception is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive 1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selection criterion is chosen and press the controller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station. "Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory location is selected.
7. Press the controller. The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond, the stations are stored for the remote control currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys You can store a station on the programmable memory keys, refer also to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired key for a longer period.
Changing a memory position 1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station. "Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
167
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory location is selected. The number of the memory location appears beside the name or frequency of the station.
6. Press the controller. The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System On the FM waveband, additional information is broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. Where reception is poor or in the event of interference, it may take some time before the station names will appear in the dis- play.
Switching RDS on/off* 1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
High Definition Radio* Many stations transmit analog and digital sig- nals. You can receive these stations digitally for improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available to be able to receive digital stations.
Switching digital radio reception on/off iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
Digital station reception is now switched on.
This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.
R ad
io
168
Some stations do not transmit the digital and analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an area in which digital reception of the selected station is not possible continuously, reception will alternate between analog and digital. This can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this case it may be preferable to switch off digital reception.
Selecting the programs of a digital station* Some stations broadcast several programs on a single frequency. To select one of these pro- grams:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that can be received digi- tally.
This symbol is displayed when a station is received digitally.
4. Change to the next program of the digital station using the buttons on the radio or steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 166.
Updating digitally receivable stations If on a longer journey you move out of the reception range of the stations originally received, you can update the list of stations received with the strongest signals.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con- troller.
The display of the digitally receivable stations is updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Displaying additional information With digital stations, additional information on the current track can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
169
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
1. Select the station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
When you change to another digitally received station, any additional information is displayed after a brief interruption.
S at
el lit
e ra
d io
170
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have the corresponding pack- ages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling channels iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled.
Enabling 1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller. A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is required to enable or disable.<
2. To enable the channel: Dial the phone number.
Disabling 1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis- played.
The electronic serial number is required to disable.<
3. To disable the channel: Dial the phone number.
*
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
171
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Selecting and storing a channel 1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels and categories are displayed on the Control Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets": Up to twelve channels you stored previ- ously.
> "All channels": All channels are displayed.
> "Categories": All channels, sorted by category, e.g. news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category and press the controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym- bol.
6. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
Additional information The name of the channel and additional infor- mation on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
S at
el lit
e ra
d io
172
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing a channel 1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca- tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time.
Changing channels with buttons on CD player
Press the button for the corre- sponding direction. The system switches to the next enabled chan- nel.
Notes When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal is received, a message appears on the Control Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depend- ing on environmental or topographic con-
ditions, it may not be possible to receive any signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this. A signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to high-rise build- ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other strong sources of radio interference. Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig- nal becomes available again.<
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
173
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files* CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting the CD player The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. The CD is pulled in automatically. Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. When playing CDs with compressed audio files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to read in the data, depending on the directory structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. On cars with a CD changer, select "CD" and press the controller to start the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is switched on.
Via programmable memory keys You can store the CD player function on the programmable memory keys to start the CD player, refer to page 21.
Starting the CD changer Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to page 177.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
*
C D
p la
ye r a
n d
C D
c h
an g
er
174
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Select the desired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is selected and played.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga- zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on the Control Display.
Via programmable memory keys You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory keys to start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on the CD player Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired track is reached. The track is displayed on the Control Display. You can also change the track with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Turn the controller to select a track.
Compressed audio files* 1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press
the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
To change the directory: Select the directory and press the controller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
175
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the car is equipped with two CD drives, you can save specific tracks on the programmable memory keys, refer to page 21.
Displaying information about the track* With compressed audio files, any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Sampling tracks, Scan All tracks on the current CD are automatically sampled once in succession.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected track is played on.
Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all the tracks in the current directory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.
> To sample all the tracks on the CD, select "Scan all" and press the control- ler.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track is retained.
C D
p la
ye r a
n d
C D
c h
an g
er
176
Repeating tracks 1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all the tracks in the current directory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.
Random play sequence The tracks on the current CD are played once each in random order.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
177
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all the tracks in the current direc- tory in random order, select "Random directory" and press the controller.
> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran- dom order, select "Random all" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction. The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is distorted.
CD magazine
Coupe
Convertible
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the left side panel in the cargo bay.
Removing the CD magazine To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine, you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2. The CD magazine is ejected.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs: Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on top.
Removing CDs: Pull out the desired drawer, see arrow, and remove the CD.
C D
p la
ye r a
n d
C D
c h
an g
er
178
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc- tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels applied as these can become detached during playback due to heat build-up and can cause irreparable damage to the device. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other- wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no longer eject. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus, otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<
General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it has been inserted correctly.
Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/ DVDs, one of the following factors may be the cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen designed for this purpose.
Damage prevention Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs. Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/ DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.
Care Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as needed by wiping it with a commercially avail- able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the center of the disc outwards. For more informa- tion on taking care of CDs/DVDs, please refer to the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
179
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
AUX-In port
You can connect an external audio device, for instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system. You can adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker system, connect the headset or line-out port of the external device to the AUX-in port.
Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con- troller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Via programmable memory keys You can store the "AUX" function on a program- mable memory key to start audio playback, refer to page 21.
U S
B -a
u d
io in
te rf
ac e
180
USB-audio interface
You can connect audio devices, e.g. an iPod or a USB device (MP3 player, USB stick) to the USB-audio interface. They can be operated via iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format can be played.
Due the variety of audio devices on the market, it cannot be guaranteed that every device will be operable on the vehicle. Ask your BMW center about what audio devices are suitable.
Connecting Lift up the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback: TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Depending on your vehicle's equipment version, it may contain a storage pouch
for your audio device. The pouch is located under the center armrest.<
iPod To connect the iPod use the BMW cable adapter for Apple iPod. For more information, contact the BMW center or go to the Internet: www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud- speaker system, connect the iPod to ports 1 and 2.
The iPod's menu structure is supported by the USB-audio interface.
USB device To connect the device, use the included flexible adapter cable to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical damage.<
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud- speaker system, connect the USB device to port 2.
After the device is connected for the first time, the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of music) and the playlists are transferred from the USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may take some time. The duration depends on the USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices or for about 20,000 tracks can be stored on the vehi- cle.
If a fifth USB device is connected and if more than 20,000 tracks are to be stored, the infor- mation on existing tracks may be lost.
Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive If the audio device has a device name, the name is displayed.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".
*
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
181
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "AUX" is selected and press the con- troller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio device and press the controller.
Playback begins with the first track.
Via programmable memory keys You can store the "USB" function on a pro- grammable memory key to start audio play- back, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track You can call up the tracks using the playlists and information. With USB devices you can also call up tracks using the file directory. The tracks can be displayed if they have been stored in the Latin alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art- ists", and press the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the track Any information about the current track that has been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
U S
B -a
u d
io in
te rf
ac e
182
Repeating tracks 1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- troller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- troller.
Random play sequence You can play the tracks in the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con- troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random play:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the corresponding direction.
Notes Do not expose the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which could compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting > The USB-audio interface acts as the power
supply to the connected audio devices, pro- vided that this is supported by the audio device. Therefore, do not connect the USB audio device to the power socket in the vehicle during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to charge external devices.
N a
vi g
a ti
o n
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
D ri
vi n
g t
ip s
183
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls C
om m
un ic
at io
ns M
o b
il it
y
Communications This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
186
Telephoning
The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After pairing a suitable mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run- ning or the ignition is switched on. You can store the pairing data for up to four mobile phones simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected at the same time, the mobile phone last paired can be operated via the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter* The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile phone's battery and connect the mobile phone to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures better network reception and consistent repro- duction quality. Please contact your BMW center to find out for which mobile phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer- gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed description of safety precautions and informa- tion, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa- tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones Please ask your BMW center which mobile phones with Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package and/ or which mobile phones are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these mobile phones sup- port the functions described in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other mobile phones.
Care instructions You can find what you need to know about car- ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Operating options You can operate the mobile phone* using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10
> iDrive, refer to page 191
> Voice commands, refer to page 197
> Programmable memory keys, refer to page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth- erwise malfunctions may result.
Making phone calls with the BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist calls You can use the BMW Assist System via the hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
*
187
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
When the status information "BMW Assist" or "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica- tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con- nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress. If this happens, you must unpair the mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the vehicle The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full preparation package mobile phone. You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehi- cle, refer to page 191, and in the mobile phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone, some default settings may be necessary for the mobile phone: e.g. using the following menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection without confirmation
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the power-saving mode setting, for example, may result in a paired mobile phone not being detected by the vehicle.
> For pairing purposes, define any number as the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue- tooth passkey is no longer required after pairing has been successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition 1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop button.
Preparation via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the button to call up the start menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
188
7. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con- troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control- ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.
Preparation via the mobile phone 10. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the model. Please refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions, e.g. under the topics of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking or Pairing. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also appears on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.
Pairing Depending on your mobile phone, you will see messages, first on the mobile phone display or on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same Bluetooth passkey previously determined by you.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, you will have approx. 30 seconds to enter your Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the Control Display.
13. Move the highlight marker to the third field from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.
14. Wait several seconds until the "Communi- cation" menu is displayed.
The next time you use the mobile phone inside the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more than 2 minutes as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
With some mobile phones it may be nec- essary to make certain settings for a per-
manent Bluetooth link, e.g. using the authoriza- tion or secure connection menu item, refer to your mobile phone's operating instructions.<
189
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- ted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends on your mobile phone and can take several min- utes; please refer to your mobile phone's oper- ating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters may not be displayed.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired, the pairing data for the mobile phone whose pairing data was first stored on the vehicle is deleted.
Checks to perform if pairing is unsuccessful > Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You can obtain information on the Internet at: www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile phone and vehicle match? The same Blue- tooth passkey must be entered on the mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be connected with the mobile phone. If neces- sary, delete connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding? Switch the mobile phone off and on or briefly disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con- troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing fails again, contact BMW Customer Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations: Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number for BMW Customer Rela- tions and information necessary for pairing appear on the display. In mobile phones that are already connected, you can select the BMW Customer Relations phone number to place the call.
List of paired mobile phones Mobile phones with pairing data stored by the vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile phones are detected by the vehicle at the same
T el
ep ho
n in
g
190
time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can be operated via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile phones via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con- troller.
The selected mobile phone moves up one posi- tion on the list.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the vehicle Should you no longer wish to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile phone's pairing data.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to call up the start menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. "Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con- troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are deleted as well.
191
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac- tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone, if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle, and other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be used in combination with the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Press the button to call up the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second field from the top, select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deac- tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main- tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions using iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> dialing phone numbers
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone book
T el
ep ho
n in
g
192
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control out of the ignition switch, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.
Voice quality If the person you are talking to is having difficul- ties understanding you, this may be due to excessive background noise. The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize voice quality during a call, we recommend that you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing air flow from the automatic climate control or by pointing the open front air vents downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys- tem
Requirements > The mobile phone's pairing data are stored
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper- ational.
> The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the vehicle.
Calling up communication Many of the functions described below are con- trolled using the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to call up "Communication".
Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num- ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.
Accepting a call press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
"Accept" is selected. Press the controller.
Rejecting a call Select "Reject" and press the controller. The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.
193
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Calling
Dialing phone numbers 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by select- ing the digits individually and pressing the controller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number. The letters correspond to the numbers on the keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit: Move the controller towards the right to select the arrow and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler. Alternatively: press the button on the steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are talking to, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Via programmable memory keys You can store phone numbers on the program- mable memory keys to call these numbers directly, refer to page 21.
Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
1. Select the phone number and press the controller.
2. "End call" is selected. Press the controller.
Selecting a phone number from the phone book or from a list of stored phone numbers Phone numbers you have dialed, received calls and phone book entries are stored in lists when the mobile phone is linked to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone book, the name of the entry is displayed instead of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z" The entries in your mobile phone's phone
T el
ep ho
n in
g
194
book, consisting of names and phone num- bers, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8" The eight numbers dialed most frequently from the "A - Z" phone book are automati- cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial" The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls" The phone numbers of the last eight rejected calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.
> "Received calls" The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been transmitted.
Selecting phone numbers from phone book The "A - Z" list is available for your phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries, select the initial letter of the desired entry and press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.
You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.
Dialing a stored phone number from a list To select an entry and establish a connection:
195
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select a list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.
Deleting an individual entry 1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller. The entry is deleted.
Deleting the entire list 1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.
BMW Contact* If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you, you can have several service numbers dis- played:
> BMW Roadside Assistance* if you need help in the event of a breakdown
> BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser- vice appointment, for example
> BMW Customer Relations* for information related to your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 201.
You can dial the displayed service numbers if your mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
T el
ep ho
n in
g
196
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con- troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact will be established.
Dialing phone numbers via touch tones Touch-tone dialing is required for access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g. for remote querying on an answering machine.
This function is available whenever there is a connection.
1. Establish connection.
2. Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired touch-tone character and press the controller. Each selection is transmitted immediately and is confirmed by a tone, depending on the type of mobile phone you are using.
Switching between mobile phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free system* You can continue ongoing calls outside of the vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free system as long as the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically switch to hands-free mode:
> Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may be possible to continue the conversation via the hands-free system. Refer to the display on your mobile phone
197
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
and/or your mobile phone's operating instructions.
> Press the button above the storage compartment. The changeover can take several seconds.
From hands-free system to mobile phone If you are making a call via the hands-free sys- tem, it may be possible to continue the call via the mobile phone, depending on your mobile phone model. Refer to the display on your mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper- ating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth link.
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are using, it may occur that calls are switched from the hands-free system to the mobile phone if reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice commands*
The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to take a hand off the steering wheel. During your entries, you will be guided in many cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation via iDrive, refer to page 191.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating the system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice commands Press the button on the steering wheel or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name rather than a command, canceling is only possi- ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read aloud The system recognizes specific commands that must be pronounced exactly word for word. You can have the possible commands for any function read aloud to you:
Using alternative commands Often there is more than a single command to run a function, e.g.:
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{...}Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
T el
ep ho
n in
g
198
Example: dialing phone numbers Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the instructions You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini- mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is established.
Correcting phone numbers After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book The phone book entries can be called up auto- matically from your mobile phone's memory.
Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.
Redialing The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Command Voice control response
{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or {{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial} {{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
1. {Dial name}. The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
199
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Notes
Important for voice commands For voice commands, bear in mind the follow- ing:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive empha- ses and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof closed to prevent interference from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while speaking.
Inserting/removing snap-in adapter 1. Press area 1 around the button and take off
the cover*.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter: Press area 1 around the button.
Inserting mobile phone 1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the mobile phone up towards the electrical con- tact points and press it downward until it engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer- ing is unlocked.
To conserve battery power, you should avoid using the mobile phone when the
ignition is switched off.<
T el
ep ho
n in
g
200
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
201
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center if an Emergency Request* has been sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you hav- ing to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist service will be available. The BMW Assist sys- tem can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.
Requirements You can use BMW Assist when the following requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the ser- vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 206.
Offered services The following services are available via BMW Assist:
> Emergency Request, refer to page 236: When you press the SOS button, a connec- tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic Collision Notification: Under certain conditions, a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center after a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: You can call BMW Roadside Assistance* should you require help in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and position data are transmitted during this call.
> Customer Relations: For all information related to your vehicle you can be connected with BMW Customer Relations.
> TeleService: Data on your vehicle's service status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW center either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: Contact the BMW Assist Response Center if your remote control or key is not available and you would like to have the vehicle unlocked.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: After you report your vehicle stolen with the police, call the BMW Assist Response Cen- ter to determine its position.
In addition, optional services can be provided to you, such as the Concierge service or informa- tion on directions, traffic or the weather. You can use Critical Calling to activate a limited number of calls via the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. when you do not have your mobile phone with you. Press the SOS button in order to contact the BMW Assist Response Center, see below.
*
B M
W A
ss is
t
202
You can also access BMW Assist Concierge services via the Internet.
Characteristics of the offered services The following characteristics apply to the ser- vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can be vehicle data, for example, your current position or the Condition Based Service CBS data.
Using services
Contacting the BMW Assist Response Center You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open. The arrangement of the switches and indi- cator lamps varies slightly among vehicle equipment versions.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Roadside Assistance iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.
If the current location can be determined, the current vehicle position is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
203
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
TeleService
Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto- matically prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW center was notified.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con- troller.
Manual service notification You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Service Request"
5. Press the controller.
B M
W A
ss is
t
204
6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.
The service-relevant data are transmitted. Your BMW center will contact you to arrange a ser- vice appointment.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations For all information related to your vehicle you can call BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with BMW Customer Relations.
Concierge service* When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you can obtain information about, e.g., current events, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive the corresponding telephone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
Concierge service requires additional enabling by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling the Concierge 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control- ler.
5. Select "Start Service" and press the con- troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist Concierge.
205
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
Displaying transmitted data Select a received message, if applicable, and press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance 1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> Press "Call" to make a telephone call. A pre- requisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle.
> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the address to the navigation system for desti- nation guidance.
Adapting BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services If the services offered by BMW Assist change, you will be notified. In that event you may update the service functions.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller. The currently available BMW Assist ser- vices are displayed.
6. If necessary, select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the controller.
Terminating services* When you terminate the services, the connec- tion to BMW Assist is deactivated.
B M
W A
ss is
t
206
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the controller.
BMW Assist is blocked from use, and your vehi- cle's current position will not be transmitted in case of an Emergency Request*. To unblock the services, reactivate BMW Assist, see below. The contractual agreement is not affected by this.
Reactivate BMW Assist, if necessary, to log on again.
Activating BMW Assist BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser- vices.
Requirements > Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current location. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during the activation process.
Activating 1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
207
E n
te rt
a in
m e
n t
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n M
o b
il it
y
until "Enabled services" is selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con- troller. BMW Assist is activated and data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. Progress status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues in the background.
Displaying vehicle data When BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle may be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Profile" is selected and press the con- troller.
Mobility This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and breakdown assistance.
R ef
u el
in g
210
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu- eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con- tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.
Closing Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes- sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door In the event of a malfunction, you can release the fuel filler door manually:
Coupe
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side- wall of the cargo bay.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.
Convertible
1. Loosen the right-hand cargo bay trim panel by turning the screws by 90, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol. The fuel filler door is released.
Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels, follow the safety instructions provided at filling stations,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead to
> premature pump shutoff
M o
b il
it y
211
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov- ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity Approx. 16.1 US gallons/61 liters, including the reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this would cause permanent damage to the
catalytic converter. Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing 85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system will be dam- aged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 328i/xi: 87
> 335i/xi: 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci- fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands Field experience has indicated significant dif- ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain- ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in driveability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi- tions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter driveability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
212
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety It is not merely the tires' service life, but also driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving safety that depend on the condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pres- sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi- tion that can not only compromise your vehi- cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam- age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting tire inflation pressures, always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 92.<
Inflation pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of 100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found on the driver's-side door post when the driver's door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres- sures listed on the following pages in the col- umns for traveling speeds including those exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the laws could occur.
M o
b il
it y
213
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 36/250
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 33/230 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 38/260 - 35/240 - 38/260
with Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
225/45 R 17 91 V 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 35/240 42/290
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 33/230 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 38/260 - 35/240 - 41/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
214
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 33/230 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 33/230 - 32/220 - 38/260
with Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 32/220 38/260
225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 32/220 33/230 33/230 38/260 42/290
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 33/230 33/230 33/230 38/260 42/290
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 35/240 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 33/230 - 35/240 - 41/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
M o
b il
it y
215
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 35/240 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 39/270 - 36/250 - 39/270
with Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 35/240 32/220 35/240 36/250 44/300
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 35/240 - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 39/270 - 38/260 - 42/290
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
216
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S
32/220 35/240 32/220 32/220 35/240 41/280
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 35/240 - 38/260
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240
with Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 94 V M+S
32/220 35/240 36/250 36/250 39/270 45/310
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 36/250 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 39/270 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 35/240 - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 35/240 - 35/240 - 39/270
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
M o
b il
it y
217
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 38/260 32/220 36/250 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 32/220 36/250 36/250 44/300
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 36/250 - 44/300
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
218
with Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S 225/50 R 16 92 H M+S 225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 38/260 32/220 36/250 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 91 W 32/220 38/260 32/220 39/270 41/280 48/330
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 33/230 41/280 41/280 48/330
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 35/240 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 39/270 - 46/320
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 39/270 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
M o
b il
it y
219
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 36/250 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 32/220 36/250 36/250 44/300
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 35/240 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 38/260 - 44/300
with Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 38/260 32/220 36/250 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 33/230 41/280 41/280 48/330
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 36/250 - 44/300
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 39/270 - 46/320
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 39/270 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 247.
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
220
Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT 3006 means that the tire was manufactured in week 30 of 2006.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, how- ever, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris- tics and climate.
Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<
Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
e.g.
Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Radial belt construction Rim diameter in inches Load rating, not on ZR tires Speed code letter, in front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 17 91 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0705
M o
b il
it y
221
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC Run-Flat Tires You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 222.
M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.
XL Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/ 3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface. When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove are distributed around the tire's circumference; the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazard and consequential dam- ages. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same applies to any other abnormal road behavior, such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi- ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the nearest BMW center or tire shop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed there. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dan- gerous for vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Tire age For various reasons, such as the development of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace- ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of the actual wear of the tires.
W h
ee ls
a n
d ti
re s
222
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in the tire coding: DOT ... 0705 means that the tire was manufac- tured in week 07 of 2005.
Run-Flat Tires
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall. Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self- supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce- ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can continue to be used subject to certain restric- tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 93.
New wheels and tires Have new wheels and tires installed only by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan- ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal- anced.<
Retreaded tires BMW recommends that you do not use retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten- tially different tire casing structures and often wide variations in tire age, which can result in a limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends that damaged Run-Flat Tires be replaced
rather than repaired. Otherwise, subsequent damage cannot be ruled out.<
BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions, which could lead to body contact and thus to severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot guarantee their driving safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com- bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is also necessary to ensure reliable operation of various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or RPA.
To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single brand and tread configuration. After a tire has been dam- aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi- nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor TPM electronics When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect a puncture, refer to page 93. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.
M o
b il
it y
223
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high- est standards in terms of safety and handling characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed Always comply with the speed limit for the winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci- dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the maximum permitted speed for the mounted tires must be displayed in your field of view. Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center can supply these labels.
Storage Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels.
Swapping wheels between axles BMW advises against swapping wheels between the front and rear axles, even if all tires have the same size, as this could impair driving characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes, swapping wheels between the axles is not per- missible.
Snow chains* Only certain fine-link snow chains have been tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and recommended. Consult your BMW center for more information. Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac- turer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading. When driving with snow chains, you may find it helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to page 90.<
U n
d er
th e
h o
o d
224
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos- sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide- lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a BMW center or by a workshop that work according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz- ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
In order to avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result. If you see any signs while driving your vehicle that the hood is not completely closed, stop at once and close it securely.<
M o
b il
it y
225
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 227
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean- ing system and window washer system, refer to page 65
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to page 237
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil
Engine oil The engine oil consumption is dependent on driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted driving for at least approx. 6.5 miles/10 km. You can have the oil level displayed while you are driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a level surface and the engine is running.
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or down repeatedly until the appropriate symbol is shown in the display, accompa- nied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever. The oil level is checked and the reading dis- played.
U n
d er
th e
h o
o d
226
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on a level surface, or about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum: Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil on page 227.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective. Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 79. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Display via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control- ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the uppermost field. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to the second field from the top. Turn the con- troller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the controller. The oil level is dis- played.
Possible messages > "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement..." The engine oil level is measured. This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at a stand- still on a level surface and the engine is run- ning, and about 5 minutes while the car is on the move.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil." Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
M o
b il
it y
227
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to Adding engine oil below.
> "Engine oil level too high"
Too much oil will harm the engine. Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter- val for engine oil" Do not add engine oil. You can continue your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- tance remaining to the next oil service, refer to page 79. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Con- trol Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health hazards may result.<
Oil change Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Specified engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives as these may cause engine damage.<
Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not available, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use oils with the API SM specification or higher.
Your BMW center will be glad to answer any questions regarding BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity ratings Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and is categorized in SAE classes.
Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends on the regional climatic conditions in which you normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the 5W-40 and 5W-30 classes.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside temperatures.
Coolant Do not add coolant to the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive. Not all commercially available additives are suit- able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor- tant to follow the instructions on the contain- ers.<
U n
d er
th e
h o
o d
228
Comply with the appropriate environ- mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level 1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between the maximum and minimum marks in the filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.
M o
b il
it y
229
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The objective is to optimize efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte- nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com- prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig- nificant benefit.
CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the remaining times or distances for selected main- tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates displayed, refer to page 79:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending on local regulations
Service data in the remote control Your vehicle continuously stores service- requirement information in the remote control while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi- sor can read out this data from the remote con- trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte- nance approach. Whenever you take your car in for servicing you should therefore hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor- rectly, refer to page 82; otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.
BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your
BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<
M ai
n te
n an
ce
230
Socket for On-Board Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust emissions can be checked by a device via the OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the left, on the bottom of the instrument panel underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values The warning lamp lights up: The exhaust emission values have worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If this happens, you should reduce your speed and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly lead to serious damage of emissions-related components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas cap is not properly tightened and the OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a device for recording or sending certain vehicle data or information. In addition, if you have signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding services.
Care Important information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
M o
b il
it y
231
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
Coupe
The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment on the right-hand side of the cargo bay. Remove the cover.
Convertible The onboard tool kit is stored in a pouch under the cargo bay floor panel.
Wiper blades
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook on the bottom, see arrow.
3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.
4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the windshield, see arrow.
To avoid damage, make sure that the wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore, be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav- ing your BMW center perform any work that you do not feel competent to perform yourself or that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to the touch, otherwise you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems, always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits could result. To avoid possible injury or equip- ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- turer.<
R ep
la ci
n g
c o
m p
o n
en ts
232
For care and maintenance of the headlamps, please follow the instructions in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.
If the routine for changing a particular bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause irritation to the retina.<
Xenon lamps These bulbs have a very long service life and are highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never- theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue the journey with great care, provided that local legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system, including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if such work is carried out improperly, the high voltage in the system presents the danger of fatal injuries.<
Access to the lamps 1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the head- lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
the catches towards the rear, see arrows, and pull the cover forward and out.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat- tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover, oth- erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking lamps, daytime running lamps H8 bulb, 35 watts
1. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the lamps.
2. Turn the bulb approx. 90, see arrow, and take it out.
3. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.
4. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
5. Reattach the cover.
Corner-illuminating lamp* H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the lamps.
M o
b il
it y
233
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor towards the right and fold it up.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
7. Reattach the cover.
Tail lamps
Coupe > Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid: H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other lamps: W16W bulb, 16 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in the fender.
1 Turn signal
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
3 Backup lamp
4 Brake lamp, consisting of two individual bulbs
5 Brake Force Display lamp
6 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
If one of the bulbs 2, 5 or 6 malfunctions, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Convertible > Turn signal:
PY21W bulb, 21 watts
> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid: H21W bulb, 21 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in the fender.
1 Turn signal
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
3 Backup lamp
4 Brake lamp, consisting of two individual bulbs
5 Brake Force Display lamp
6 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp, LED
If one of the bulbs 2 to 6 malfunctions, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.
Fender-mounted lamps
Coupe 1. Left-hand side: use a screwdriver to pry off
the cover in the cargo bay and remove the cover.
Right-hand side: remove the cover from the right-hand side panel of the cargo bay.
R ep
la ci
n g
c o
m p
o n
en ts
234
2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see arrow, and pull out.
3. Turn signal indicator: apply gentle pressure to the bulb while turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
Backup lamps and brake lamps: take out the bulbs and change them.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Convertible 1. Turn the screws on the corresponding side,
see arrow, by 90 and remove the cover.
2. While applying light pressure, turn the bulb holder of the turn signal bulb to the left.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
License plate lamp and center brake lamp These lamps use LED technology for operation. In the event of a malfunction, please contact your BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with Run-Flat Tires as standard. This removes the need to change a wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on page 93.
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to Run-Flat Tires, page 222.
When mounting new tires or changing over from summer to winter tires and vice versa, mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer also to New wheels and tires, page 222.
The tools for changing wheels are avail- able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
M o
b il
it y
235
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting on page 237.
Disposal Have old batteries disposed of by your BMW center or hand them in to a recy-
cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery against tipping over during transport.<
Power failure After a temporary power loss, the functioning of some equipment may be limited and require reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date These values must be updated, refer to page 81.
> Radio In some cases, stations may have to be stored again, refer to page 166.
> Navigation system Operability must be waited for, refer to page 132.
> Glass roof It may happen that the roof can only be raised. The system must be initialized. Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory The positions must be stored again, refer to page 50.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass The system must be calibrated, refer to page 112.
Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth- erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti- mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and remove it.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set in holders on the distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse assignment.
G iv
in g
a n
d re
ce iv
in g
a ss
is ta
n ce
236
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request* Conditions for an Emergency Request:
> Equipment version with full preparation package mobile phone. This equipment makes it possible to send an Emergency Request even if no mobile phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 206.
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network.
> The Emergency Request system is opera- ble.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti- vated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, Emergency Requests are not possible. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request 1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button for at least 2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Assist Response Center will be able to initiate further steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been estab- lished. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may still be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency Request is sent automatically immediately after a severe accident. This Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by the button being pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to assist you around the clock in the event of a breakdown, including on weekends and public holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- tance in your home country can be found in the Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can establish contact with BMW Roadside Assis- tance for breakdown assistance directly via iDrive, refer to page 202.
M o
b il
it y
237
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
First aid pouch* Some of the articles contained in the first aid pouch have a limited service life. Therefore, check the expiration dates of the contents reg- ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec- essary.
Coupe
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Convertible
The first aid pouch is located in a compartment under the front passenger's seat.
To open: press the button and fold the cover down. To close: fold the cover back up and press it into the catch.
Warning triangle*
Coupe
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand side of the cargo bay. Press the tab to take it out.
Convertible
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the luggage compartment lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
Jump starting If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's engine can be started by connecting two jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow- ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<
G iv
in g
a n
d re
ce iv
in g
a ss
is ta
n ce
238
Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi- cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables Connect the jumper cables in the correct order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in the engine compartment which acts as the bat- tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine compartment overview on page 225. The cap is marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con- nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi- cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the minus/ jumper cable to the negative termi- nal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine 1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first start attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away Observe the applicable laws and regula- tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
M o
b il
it y
239
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Using a tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard tool kit under- neath the cover on the right-hand side of the cargo bay, refer to page 231.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard tool kit underneath the cargo bay floor, refer to page 231.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread Rectangular cover panel in bumper: Press on the upper edges of the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 59, otherwise the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when the engine is not running. Thus, braking and steering will require increased effort. Active steering is not active and it will be necessary to turn the steering wheel further.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend- ing on local regulations.
Manual transmission Gearshift lever in idle position.
Automatic transmission Selector lever in position N. Changing selector lever positions, refer to page 62.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph or 70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods In some countries, it is illegal to tow your vehicle with a tow bar or tow rope on public highways.
Please familiarize yourself with the relevant towing regulations for the country in which you are driving.
With a tow bar The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle, please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
G iv
in g
a n
d re
ce iv
in g
a ss
is ta
n ce
240
With a tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could result in damage.<
With a tow truck: vehicle without xDrive
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-
age may result.<
With a tow truck: vehicle with xDrive Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just the front or rear axle raised, otherwise the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case could be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface only.
Tow-starting Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi- ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to page 237. Vehicles with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 59.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent Control HDC when the vehicle is being
tow-started, page 90.<
M o
b il
it y
241
R e
fe re
n ce
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t
Reference This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice command system and an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
T ec
h n
ic al
d at
a
244
Technical data
Engine data
Coupe
Convertible
328i/xi 335i/xi
Displacement cu in/cm 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400 - 5,000
328i 335i
Displacement cu in/cm 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400 - 5,000
R e
fe re
n ce
245
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38 ft 9 in/11.8 m. 335i/xi: height approx. 4 ft 6 in/1,375 mm
T ec
h n
ic al
d at
a
246
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m.
R e
fe re
n ce
247
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Weights
Coupe
Convertible
Capacities
328i 328xi 335i 335xi
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,351/1,520 3,582/1,625 3,571/1,620 3,759/1,705
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,417/1,550 3,627/1,645 3,582/1,625 3,770/1,710
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,277/1,940 4,508/2,045 4,497/2,040 4,685/2,125
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,343/1,970 4,552/2,065 4,508/2,045 4,696/2,130
Load lbs/kg 926/420 926/420 926/420 926/420
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,061/935 2,260/1,025 2,172/985 2,326/1,055
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,293/1,040 2,326/1,055 2,348/1,065 2,381/1,080
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 15.5/440 15.5/440 15.2/430 15.2/430
328i 335i
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,792/1,720 3,946/1,790
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,858/1,750 3,957/1,795
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,674/2,120 4,828/2,190
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,740/2,150 4,839/2,195
Load lbs/kg 882/400 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,105/955 2,205/1,000
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg - -
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 7.4 - 12.4/210 - 350 7.4 - 12.4/210 - 350
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 211
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system For more details: page 65
including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
S h
o rt
c o
m m
an d
s fo
r t h
e vo
ic e
co m
m an
d s
ys te
m
248
Short commands for the voice command system
With short commands you can carry out certain functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north}, {Assistance window map direction of travel}, {Assistance window arrow display}, {Assistance window perspective}, {Assistance window current position}, {Assistance window trip computer} or {Assistance window onboard info}
To change the scale in the assistance window 149
{Assistance window scale ... feet} or {Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To open phone 193 {Phone}
To dial phone number 193 {Dial number}
To display phone book 193 {A to Z}
To select from phone book 193 {Call ...} or {Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 193 {Top 8}
Redialing 193 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 193 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 193 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 187 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 206 {BMW Assist}
To open "BMW Service" services 202 {BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 195 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 195 {BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 202 {Roadside Assistance}
R e
fe re
n ce
249
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation 140 {Navigation}
To display current position 155 {Current position}
To open "Enter address" 134 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 134 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 139 {Input map}
To open "Information" 140 {Info menu}
To display address book 142 {Address book} or {From address book}
To display destination list 141 {Destination list}
To switch on destination guidance 147 {Start guidance}
To switch off destination guidance 147 {Stop guidance}
To display route criteria 145 {Route preference}
To switch on voice instructions 150 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 150 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 151 {Repeat navigation info}
To show arrow display 148 {Arrow display}
To display map 149 {Map}, {Map facing north}, {Map direction of travel} or {Perspective}
To open route 136, 151 {Route menu}
To open "New route" 151 {New route}
To change scale 149 {Scale ... miles} or {Scale ... feet}
To display towns/cities and streets along the route 150
{Route list}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 76 {Car Data}
To display computer 76 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 77 {Trip computer}
To open speed limit 85 {Limit}
To open stopwatch 86 {Stopwatch}
To activate road-speed limit 85 {Limit on}
To deactivate road-speed limit 85 {Limit off}
S h
o rt
c o
m m
an d
s fo
r t h
e vo
ic e
co m
m an
d s
ys te
m
250
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 161 {Audio}
To switch on radio 164 {Radio on}, {FM} or {AM}
To open "FM" 164 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 164 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 164 {FM All stations}
To select radio station 164 {Station} e.g. {Station WNYC} or {Choose station}
To open "Presets" 164 {FM presets} or {AM presets}
To open "Manual" 165 {FM manual} or {AM manual} or {Choose frequency}, {Frequency ... Megahertz}
To select preset radio station 166 {Preset ...} e.g. {Preset 1}
To open strongest radio stations 165 {AM Autostore}
To open "SAT" 171 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 171 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 172 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 171 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 171 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 173 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 173 {CD}
To open CD changer 173 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 173 {CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 173 {CD 1...6}
To select track 174 {CD track ...}
To select a CD and track in the CD changer 174 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To select track 174 {Track ...}
To open DVD 173 {DVD player menu}
To switch on DVD 173 {DVD player}
To select music track on DVD 174 {DVD track ...}
To start sound output for external audio device 179
{Audio Aux on}
R e
fe re
n ce
251
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Climate
Menu
Function Command
To open "Vent settings" 105 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 106 {Automatic programs}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 29, 32 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 54 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 64 {Lighting}
To open "BMW Service" 202 {BMW Service}
To open "Service requirements" 80, 201 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 80, 201 {Service}
To display "Check Control messages" 83 {Check Control messages}
To set brightness of Control Display 86 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 74 {Units}
To open "Language" 86, 150 {Languages}
To open "Time" 81 {Time}
To open "Date" 83 {Date}
To open "PDC" 88 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 92 {FTM}
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
252
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions and refers you to the page where these texts can be found.
A ABS Antilock Brake
System 89 ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 67 Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 236 Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate control 108
"Activation time" 109 Active cruise control 67 indicator lamps 70 malfunction 71 selecting distance 69 sensor 71 Active steering 96 warning lamp 96 Adaptive Head Light 101 "Add digits" for mobile
phone 194 Additives coolant 227 "Address book" in
navigation 142 Address for navigation deleting 144 entering 134, 142 selecting 143 storing 142 storing current position 143 "Add to destination
list" 137, 139 Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic climate control 105
Adjusting the thigh support 46 Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to Tone control 161
Airbags 97 indicator/warning lamp 98 sitting safely 45 Air conditioning mode automatic climate
control 105 ventilation 107 Air distribution automatic 106 individual 105 Air flow rate 106 Airing, refer to Ventilation 107 Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 212 Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 106 "Air recirculation on / off" 54 Air supply automatic climate
control 105 ventilation 107 Air vents 104 AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 211 Alarm system 35 avoiding unintentional
alarms 36 interior motion sensor 36 switching off an alarm 35 tilt alarm sensor 36 "All channels" for satellite
radio 171 All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 223 "All stations", displaying with
the radio 164 All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 90 "AM", waveband 160, 164
Ambient air, refer to Recirculated-air mode 106
Antenna for mobile phone 186 Antifreeze coolant 227 washer fluid 65 Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35 Anti-theft system 29 Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 247 Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 247 Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 114 Arrival time, refer to
Computer 76 Arrival time, refer to Starting
destination guidance 147 Arrow display for
navigation 148 "Arrow display" in
navigation 148 Ashtray front 116 rear 116 Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control systems 89
Assistance window 20 refer to iDrive 20 AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 106 "Audio" 163, 167 Audio 160 controls 160 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 "Audio", refer to Tone
control 161 Audio device, external 114
R e
fe re
n ce
253
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Automatic air distribution 106 air flow rate 106 cruise control 66, 67 headlamp control 100 service notification 203 storing of stations 165 Automatic climate control 104 automatic air
distribution 106 settings via iDrive 105 Automatic curb monitor 53 "Automatic programs" with
automatic climate control 106
Automatic recirculated-air control AUC 106
Automatic station search 165 Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61 interlock 61, 62 overriding selector lever
lock 63 shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever position 62 sport program 62 towing 238 tow-starting 238 "Automatic ventilation" 108 AUTO program for automatic
climate control 106 "Auto Request" 203 "Autostore" on the radio 166 "AUX" 160, 179, 181 AUX-In port 179 USB-audio interface 180 AUX-IN port 114 AUX-In port 179 Average fuel consumption 76 setting the units 78 Average speed 76 "Avoid ferries" in
navigation 145 "Avoid highways" in
navigation 145 Avoid highways in
navigation 145
Avoiding unintentional alarms 36
"Avoid tollroads" in navigation 145
Axle loads, refer to Weights 247
"A - Z" 193, 194
B Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 47 Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 46 Backrest width adjustment 47 Back seats refer to Rear seats 48 Backup lamps replacing bulb 233 Backup lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 233 Bag holder 118 Balance, tone control 161 Band-aids, refer to First-aid
pouch 237 Bar, refer to Towing
methods 239 Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage compartment 114
Bass, tone control 161 Bass sounds, refer to Treble
and bass 161 Battery 235 charging 235 disposal 38, 235 jump starting 237 remote control 28 temporary power failure 235 Battery renewal remote control 38 remote control for vehicle 38 Being towed 239 Belt hand-over 52 pinch protection system 52 Belts, refer to Safety belts 51
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety belts 51
Beverage holders, refer to Cup holders 115
Blinds, refer to Roller sun blinds 113
Blower, refer to Air flow rate 106
Bluetooth, refer to separate Owner's Manual
"BMW Assist" 202, 203, 204 BMW Assist activating 206 Concierge service 204 contacting BMW Customer
Relations 204 Roadside Assistance 202 services offered 201 TeleService 203 "BMW Contact" 196 "BMW Contact
Numbers" 196 BMW Homepage 4 BMW Maintenance
System 229 "BMW Service settings" 207 BMW webpage 4 Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 115 Brake assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 89 Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 79 Brake Force Display 96 Brake lamps replacing bulb 233 two-stage 96 Brake pads 124 breaking in 124 Brake rotors 126 brakes 124 breaking in 124 Brakes ABS 89 BMW Maintenance
System 229 breaking in 124 parking brake 60 service requirements 79
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
254
Brakes, refer to Braking safely 126
Brake system 124 BMW Maintenance
System 229 breaking in 124 disc brakes 126 Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 236 Breaking in the clutch 124 Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and differential 124
Break-in period 124 Brightness of the Control
Display 86 "Brightness" on the Control
Display 86 Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 231 Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/stop button 59 Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C California Proposition 65
warning 6 "Call" 194, 205 Call accepting 192 displaying accepted 194 ending 193 missed 194 starting 193 Calling from phone book 193 from Top 8 list 194 redialing 194 Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 115 Capacities 247 Capacity of the cargo bay 247 Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 235 Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
"Car Data" 76 Care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure Cargo, securing 128 Cargo bay capacity 247 convenient access 37 folding up the floor
panel 119 lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 103 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 Cargo loading securing cargo 128 stowing cargo 127 vehicle 127 Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Car jack jacking points 235 Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28 Car phone 186 installation location, refer to
Center armrest 114 refer to Mobile phone 186 refer to separate Owner's
Manual Car radio, refer to Radio 164
Car wash 126 also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure with convenient access 37 Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 125 "Categories" for satellite
radio 171 CBS Condition Based
Service 229 "CD" 160, 173 CD changer 173 compressed audio files 173 controls 160 fast forward/reverse 177 installation location 177 playing a track 175 random order 176 repeating a track 176 selecting a CD 173 selecting a track 174 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 CD player 173 compressed audio files 173 controls 160 fast forward/reverse 177 playing a track 175 random order 176 repeating a track 176 selecting a track 174 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 Center armrest 114 Center brake lamp replacing bulb 234 Center console, refer to
Around the center console 14
"Central locking" 30 Central locking from inside 32 from outside 29 Central locking system 29 convenient access 36 hotel function 34
R e
fe re
n ce
255
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Changes, technical, refer to For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 231
Changing the language on the Control Display 86
Changing the measurement units on the Control Display 78
Changing wheels 234 Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 225 Check Control 83 "Check Control
messages" 85 Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 57 Child-restraint systems 56 Child seats, refer to
Transporting children safely 56
Chrome parts, care, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Cigarette lighter, refer to Lighter 116
Cleaning, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Cleaning headlamps 65 washer fluid 65 "Climate" 105 Clock 74 12h/24h mode 82 setting time 81 Closing from inside 32 from outside 29 Clothes hooks 115 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 60 Combined instrument, refer to
Instrument cluster 12 Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 36 Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14 "Communication" 192, 202, 2
03, 204
Compact disc, refer to CD changer 173 CD player 173 Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition lock 59
Compass 112 Computer 75 displays on Control
Display 76 hour signal 82 Computer, refer to iDrive 16 "Concert hall" for Tone
control 162 "Concierge" 204 Concierge service 204 Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 126 Condition Based Service
CBS 229 Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28 Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the vehicle 31
Connecting vacuum cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 116
Consumption, refer to Average consumption 76
Consumption display average consumption 76 "Continue guidance to
destination?" 148 Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16 Control Display brightness 86 changing the language 86 switching off/on 21 Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls and displays 10 Control unit, refer to iDrive 16 Convenient access 36 replacing the battery 38 what to observe before
entering a car wash 37
Convenient loading in convertible 31
Convenient operation glass roof 30 glass roof with convenient
access 37 retractable hardtop 30 windows 30 windows with convenient
access 37 Convertible bag holder 118 convenient loading 31 enlarging cargo bay 117 folding down rear
backrest 118 retractable hardtop 41 rollover protection
system 98 securing cargo 128 stowing cargo 127 Coolant 227 checking level 228 Coolant temperature 75 Cooling, maximum 106 Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 227 Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 227 Copyright 2 Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive Head Light 101
Cornering lamps, refer to Adaptive Head Light 101
Correct tires 222 Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 103 Cross-hairs in navigation 139 Cruise control 66 active 67 malfunction 67 Cruising range 75 Cup holders 115 Curb weight, refer to
Weights 247 "Current position" 155
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
256
Current position displaying 155 entering 143 storing 143 "Customer
Relations" 196, 204
D Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10 Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12 Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 103 Data, technical 244 dimensions 245 engine 244 weights 247 "Date" 83 Date setting 83 setting format 83 "Date format" 83 "Daytime running lamps" 101 Daytime running lamps 101 DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 89 "Deactivated" 51 Deactivating front passenger
airbags 97 Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 30 Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Defect door lock 32 fuel filler door 210 glass roof 40 "Delete address book" in
navigation 144 "Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 195 "Delete data" in
navigation 144 "Delete" for mobile
phone 195
Destination address deleting 144 entering 134, 138 Destination for navigation destination list 141 entry 134 home address 144 manual entry 134, 138 selecting from address
book 143 selecting using
information 140 selecting via language 138 selecting via map 139 storing 142 Destination guidance 147 canceling voice
instructions 55 changing specified
route 145 displaying route 148 distance and arrival 147 starting 147 terminating/continuing 147 voice instructions 150 volume of voice
instructions 151 Destination list for navigation
system 141 Destinations recently driven
to 141 "Details" for audio mode 181 "Dial" for mobile phone 193 "Dial number" 193 Digital clock 74 Digital compass 112 Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 167 Dimensions 245 Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 63 Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 150 Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 142 Displacement, refer to Engine
data 244 Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display lighting, refer to Instrument lighting 103
"Display off" 21 Displays on the Control Display 16 Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12 Displays and controls 10 Disposal coolant 227 remote control battery 38 vehicle battery 235 Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 67 Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service requirements 79
"Distance to dest." 77 Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance Control 88
Door key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 28
Door lock 32 "Door locks" 30, 31, 32, 80 Doors, emergency
operation 32 DOT Quality Grades 220 Draft-free ventilation 108 Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 115 Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 89
Drive-off assistant 91 Driving around a traffic
congestion 154 Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 100 Driving notes 124 Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 91 Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 148 Driving stability control
systems 89 Driving through water 126
R e
fe re
n ce
257
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Driving tips, refer to Driving notes 124
Dry air, refer to Cooling function 107
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 89
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 90
indicator/warning lamp 90 DVD for navigation 132 Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 89 "Dynamic route" in
navigation 145 Dynamic Stability Control
DSC indicator/warning lamp 90 Dynamic Traction Control
DTC indicator/warning lamp 90
E EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 89 Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 160 Electrical malfunction door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 210 glass roof 40 luggage compartment lid 33 Electric seat adjustment 46 Electric steering wheel lock with convenient access 37 Electronic oil level check 225 Emergency actuation,
automatic transmission, refer to Overriding selector lever lock 63
Emergency operation fuel filler door, manual
release 210 Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually glass roof 40
Emergency operation, refer to Manual operation
door lock 32 Emergency release luggage compartment lid
from inside 34 Emergency Request 236 Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 236 "Enabled services" 206 "Enable services" 207 "End call" 193 Energy, saving saving fuel 124 Engine breaking in 124 data 244 overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 75 speed 244 starting 60 starting, convenient
access 36 switching off 60 Engine compartment 225 Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 227 Engine oil adding 227 BMW Maintenance
System 229 capacity 247 checking level 225 intervals between changes,
refer to Service requirements 79
"Engine oil level" 226 Engine output, refer to Engine
data 244 Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 244 Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 60 "Enter address" 135 Entering a destination 135 Entering a destination
country 135 Entering a house number or
intersection 137
Entering an intersection 136 Entering a street 136 "Entertainment" 160 Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 103 "Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 163 Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 162 Error messages, refer to
Check Control 83 "ESN" 170 ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 89
Event data recorders 230 Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 125 Exterior mirrors 52 adjusting 52 automatic dimming
feature 53 automatic heating 53 folding in and out 52 External audio device 114 External audio device, refer to
AUX-In port 179 Eyes for tow-starting and towing
away 239 for tying down loads 128
F Fader, tone control 161 Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 83 Failure of an electrical
consumer 235 False alarm avoiding unintentional
alarm 36 switching off an alarm 35 Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 51 Fastest route for
navigation 145
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
258
Fast forward CD changer 177 CD player 177 "Fast route" in navigation 145 Filter refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic climate control 108
Fine wood, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
First aid pouch 237 Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 59 Flashlight, refer to LED hand
lamp 114 Flash when locking/
unlocking 31 Flat tire Run-Flat Tires 222 Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 93 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92 indicating a flat tire 93 indicator/warning lamp 93 initializing the system 92 malfunction 93 snow chains 92, 223 system limits 92 Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 221 Floor mats, carpets, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
Fluid reservoir, refer to Washer fluid reservoir 65
"FM", waveband 160, 164 FM, waveband 164 Fog lamps 102 indicator lamp 13, 102 Folding in the mirrors, before
driving into a car wash 52 Folding up the floor panel 119 Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 126 Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 103 For your own safety 5 Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 90
Frequency, selecting manually 165
Front airbags 97 FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 92 Fuel 211 average consumption 76 gauge 75 high-quality brands 211 quality 211 specifications 211 tank contents, refer to
Capacities 247 Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 75 Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75 Fuel filler door 210 releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 210 Fuses 235
G Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote control 110
Gasoline refer to Average
consumption 76 Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 211 Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 75 Gear indicator, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 61
Gearshift lever automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 manual transmission 61 Gearshifts automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 manual transmission 61 General driving notes 125
Glass roof, electric 39 closing after electrical
malfunction 40 convenient operation 30, 32 initializing 40 opening, closing 39 operation with convenient
access 37 pinch protection system 40 power failure 40 raising 39 remote control 30 Glove compartment 113 LED hand lamp 114 GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 132 Grills 104 Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 247
H Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 60 Hand lamp, refer to LED hand
lamp 114 Hands-free system 14 Hazard warning flashers 14 HDC Hill Descent Control 90 "HD radio" 167 HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 167 Head airbags 97 Headlamp control,
automatic 100 Headlamp flasher 63 indicator lamp 11, 13 Headlamps care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure Head restraints 47 front, removing 48 rear, removing 48 sitting safely 45 Heated mirrors 53 rear window 107 seats 49
R e
fe re
n ce
259
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Heating mirrors 53 rear window 107 residual heat 107 seats 49 Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 104 Heating while at a standstill,
refer to Using residual heat 107
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing cargo 127
Height, refer to Dimensions 245
Height adjustment seats 46 steering wheel 53 High beams 102 headlamp flasher 102 indicator lamp 13 High Definition Radio 167 High water, refer to Driving
through water 126 Highways, refer to Route
criteria 145 Hill Descent Control HDC 90 Hills 126 Holders for cups 115 Home address 144 "Home address" in
navigation 145 Homepage BMW 4 Hood 224 Hooks for shopping bags 118 Horn 10, 11 Hotel function, refer to
Locking or unlocking separately 34
Hot exhaust system 125 "Hour memo" 82 "House number" in
destination entry 137 Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control DBC 89
Hydroplaning 125
I IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 167 Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 74
ID3 tag, refer to Information about the track 175
Identification marks Run-Flat Tires 222 tire coding 220 iDrive 16 adjusting brightness 86 assistance window 20 automatic climate
control 105 changing language 86 changing units of measure
and display format 78 confirming selection or
entry 19 controls 16 displays, menus 17 menu guidance 17 operating principle 16 overview 16 selecting a menu item 19 setting the date and time 81 start menu 17 status information 20 switching menu pages 19 symbols 18 iDrive operating principle 16 Ignition 59 switched off 59 switched on 59 Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated key 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to Radio readiness 59
Ignition key position 2, refer to Ignition on 59
Ignition lock 59 i menu 18 Imprint 2
Indicator and warning lamps 13
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 95
Individual air distribution 105 Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 212 Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 93
Information on another location 140 on country 140 on current position 140 on destination location 140 Information menu, refer to
i menu 18 "Information on
destination" 142 "Info sources" 80 Initializing active steering 96 after power failure 235 compass, refer to
Calibrating 112 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92 glass roof 40 "Input map" 139 Installation location CD changer 177 navigation DVD drive 132 telephone 114 Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice instructions 150
Instrument cluster 12 Instrument lighting 103 Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote
control 110 Interesting destination for
navigation 140 "Interim time" 86 Interior lamps 103 remote control 31 Interior motion sensor 36
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
260
Interior rearview mirror 53 automatic dimming
feature 53 compass 112 Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 61 Intermittent mode of the
wipers 64
J Jacking points 235 Joystick, refer to iDrive 16 Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 237 Jump starting 237
K Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 28 Keyless go, refer to
Convenient access 36 Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal Profile 28
Kick-down 62 automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 Knock control 211
L Lamps automatic headlamp
control 100 parking lamps/low
beams 100 Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 231 "Language / Units" 78 "Language / Units" in
navigation 133, 150 "Language" on the Control
Display 86 "Languages" in
navigation 133, 150
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer to Safety belts 51
Lashing eyes, refer to Securing cargo 128
Last destinations, refer to Destination list 141
"Last seat pos." 51 LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 57 LED hand lamp 114 LED Light-emitting
diodes 232 Length, refer to
Dimensions 245 License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 234 Light-emitting diodes
LED 232 Lighter 116 connecting electrical
appliances 116 "Lighting" 64 Lighting instruments 103 lamps and bulbs 231 vehicle, refer to Lamps 100 Light-metal alloy wheels, care,
refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Light switch 100 "Limit" 85 Limit, refer to Speed limit 85 Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 128 Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 33 Locking adjusting confirmation
signal 31 from inside 33 from outside 30 without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 36 Locking and unlocking doors confirmation signals 31 from inside 32 from outside 29 Low-beam headlamps 100 automatic 100
Lower back support, refer to Lumbar support 47
Luggage compartment lid 33 convenient access 37 emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33 emergency release 34 locking or unlocking
separately 34 opening from inside 33 opening from outside 33 opening manually 33 remote control 31 Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 129 Lumbar support 47
M M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 223 Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet Maintenance system 229 Malfunction automatic transmission with
Steptronic 63 luggage compartment lid 33 tires 93 Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 83 Manual mode, automatic
transmission with Steptronic 62
"Manual" on the radio 165 Manual operation door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 210 glass roof 40 luggage compartment lid 33 transmission lock, automatic
transmission 63 Manual transmission 61 Map changing scale 149 destination entry 139 "Map direction of travel" 149 "Map facing north" 149
R e
fe re
n ce
261
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Master key, refer to Remote control with integrated key 28
Maximum cooling 106 Maximum speed with winter tires 223 Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 245 Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 50 Memory keys,
programmable 21 MENU button 16 Menus Control Display 17 Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Message list, traffic
information 152 Microfilter BMW Maintenance
System 229 for automatic climate
control 108 Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter BMW Maintenance
System 229 Microphone telephone 14 voice input 14 Mirror dimming feature 53 Mirrors 52 automatic curb monitor 53 exterior mirrors 52 heating 53 interior rearview mirror 53 memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 50 "Missed calls" 194 Missed calls 194
Mobile phone accepted calls 194 adjusting volume 191 calling 193 ending call 193 installation location, refer to
Center armrest 114 missed calls 194 operation via iDrive 191 redialing 194 refer to separate Owner's
Manual Top 8 194 touch tone dialing 196 Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center armrest 114
Mobile phone, refer to the separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive controls 16
Monitoring system for tire pressures, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 92
"Monitor on / off" 54 Most recent mobile phone
numbers 194 MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 173 Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 63 refer to Wiper system 64 Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 16 Music tracks, refer to
Tracks 174 "Mute on / off" 54
N "Navigation" 134, 140
Navigation announcements, refer to Switching voice instructions on/off 150
Navigation drive, location 132 Navigation DVD 132 Navigation system 132 address book 142 changing a route 151 destination entry 134 destination guidance in
assistance window 132 destination list 141 displaying current
position 155 entering a destination
manually 134, 138 last destinations 141 navigation DVD 132 opening 134 route display 148 route list 150 searching for a special
destination 140 selecting destination using
information 140 selecting destination via
map 139 selecting route criteria 145 starting destination
guidance 147 switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing destination guidance 147
terminating/continuing destination guidance 147
voice instructions 150 volume adjustment 151 "Navigation voice
instructions" 133 "Navigation voice
instructions" via buttons on the steering wheel 54
Neck support, refer to Head restraints 47
Nets, refer to Storage compartments 114
"New address" in navigation 143
"New destination" 135, 139
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
262
"New route" 151 New tires 222 "Next entertainment
source" 54 North-facing map 149 Nozzles 104 Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 244 Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 240
O OBD socket, refer to Socket
for On-Board Diagnosis 230 Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 211 Odometer 74 Oil, refer to Engine oil 225 Oil consumption 225 Oil level 225 Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 235 "On a new destination" in
navigation 141 "Onboard info" 76 Onboard tool kit 231 "On destination" 141 "On location" 141 Opening and closing convenient access 36 from inside 32 from outside 29 using the door lock 32 via the remote control 29 Operation by voice for mobile
phone 197 adjusting volume 198 canceling 197 correcting phone
number 198 dialing phone number 198 placing a call 198 redialing 198 voice commands 197 voice phone book 198 "Options" 205 Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets refer to Ventilation 107 Output, refer to Engine
data 244 Outside-air mode automatic climate
control 106 Outside-temperature
display 74 changing units of
measure 78 in computer 78 Outside temperature
warning 74 Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 75 Overriding selector lever
lock 63
P Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 88 "Parked car operation" 108 "Parked car ventilation" 108 Parked car ventilation 108 activating switch-on
times 109 preselecting switch-on
times 108 switching on and off
directly 108 Parking vehicle 60 Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 88 Parking brake 60 indicator lamp 61 Parking lamps 100 Parking lamps/low beams 100 Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 53 "Pathway lighting" 101 Pathway lighting 101 "PDC" 88 PDC Park Distance Control 88 Personal Profile 28 "Perspective" 149 Phone book 191
Phone numbers deleting from phone
book 195 dialing 193 most recent numbers 194 selecting in phone book 194 Top 8 194 Pinch protection system glass roof, electric 40 windows 39 Placing a call, refer to
telephone owner's manual "Play" for satellite radio 171 Pollen refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic climate control 108
Position displaying 155 saving, refer to Storing
current position 143 Power failure 235 Power windows 38 Power windows, refer to
Windows 38 "Presets", displaying with the
radio 164 "Presets" for satellite
radio 171 Pressure, tires 212 Pressure monitoring, tires 92 Flat Tire Monitor 92 Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 93
"Profile" 207 Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11 Programmable memory
keys 21 Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system glass roof, electric 40 windows 39 Providing medical assistance,
refer to First add pouch 237 Puncture Flat Tire Monitor 92
R e
fe re
n ce
263
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
R Radio autostore 165 controls 160 High Definition Radio 167 listening to stations 164 regional programs 167 sampling stations 165 satellite radio 170 selecting a
waveband 160, 164 selecting the frequency
manually 165 station search 165 stations with best
reception 165 storing stations 166 switching on/off 160 tone control 161 volume 161 Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 59 Radio readiness 59 switched off 59 switched on 59 Radio-remote key, refer to
Remote control with integrated key 28
Rain sensor 64 "Random", refer to Random
play 176 "Random all" for audio
mode 177 "Random directory" for audio
mode 177 Random play 176 "RDS" Radio Data
System 167 Reading lamps 103 Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 233 replacing bulb 233 Rear seats adjusting head restraints 48 folding down backrests 117 Rear turn signals replacing bulb 233 Rear ventilation 108
Rearview mirror, refer to Mirrors 52
Rear window defroster 107 Rear window roller blind, refer
to Roller sun blinds 113 "Received calls" 194 Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status information 20
Recirculated-air mode 106 Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 106 Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 46 Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 86 "Redial" for mobile phone 194 Refueling 210 Releasing hood 224 Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 75 Remote control 28 battery renewal 38 convenient access 36 garage door opener 110 luggage compartment lid 31 malfunction 31, 37 removing from the ignition
lock 59 service data 229 "Repeat directory" for audio
mode 176 "Repeat" for audio mode 176 "Repeat track" for audio
mode 176 Replacement remote
control 28 Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 231 Replacing tires 222 Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 222 Reporting safety defects 6 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 75 "Reset" 92, 94 Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 163
"Reset" for stopwatch 86 "Reset" for tone settings 163 Residual heat 107 Restraint systems for children 56 refer to Safety belts 51 Retractable hardtop 41 care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure convenient operation 30 opening and closing 42 remote control 30 Reverse CD changer 177 CD player 177 Reverse gear automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 manual transmission 61 Road map 149 "Roadside Assistance" 202 Roadside
Assistance 202, 236 Roadside parking lamps 102 Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 79 Roller sun blinds 113 Rollover protection system,
convertible 98 resetting 99 Roof load capacity 247 Roof-mounted luggage
rack 129 "Roomsound", refer to Tone
control 162 Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 240 Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
264
Route 145 arrow display 148 changing 151 display 148 displaying streets and
towns/cities 150 displaying town 150 list 150 map display 149 selecting 145 selecting criteria 145 RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run- Flat Tires 222
Rubber parts, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Runflat System Component RSC, refer to Run-Flat Tires 222
Run-Flat Tires 222 continuing driving with a
damaged tire 93 flat tire 93 Flat Tire Monitor 93 new tires 222 replacing 222 tire inflation pressure 212 winter tires 223
S Safety-belt height
adjustment 51 Safety belts 51 belt hand-over 52 damage 51 indicator/warning lamp 51 reminder 51 sitting safely 45 Safety belts, care, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
Safety systems airbags 97 Antilock Brake System
ABS 89 brake system 89 driving stability control
systems 89 Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89 rollover protection system,
convertible 98 safety belts 51 Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 222 "SAT" 160, 170 Satellite radio 170 displaying additional
information 171 enabling 170 selecting channel 171 storing channel 171 Saving fuel 124 "Scan" sampling radio stations 165 sampling tracks on CD 175 Scan CD changer 175 CD player 175 radio 165 "Scan all" for audio mode 175 "Scan directory" for audio
mode 175 Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 16 Screw thread for tow
fitting 239 SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 170 Seat adjustment electric 46 mechanical 46 Seat and mirror memory 50 Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts' reminder 51
Seat heating 49
Seats 45 adjusting electrically 46 adjusting the seats 46 heating 49 memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 50 saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 50 sitting safely 45 Securing cargo 119, 121 Securing the vehicle from inside 32 from outside 29 "Select as
destination" 141, 205 "Select current speed" 86 Selecting a country for
navigation 135 Selecting an audio source 160 Selecting distance for active
cruise control 69 Selecting menu items 19 Selecting new scale for
navigation 149 Selector lever automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever positions, shiftlock 62
Selector lever positions automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 236 Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 236 Service data in the remote
control 229 "Service Info" 80, 203, 226 Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service CBS 229
"Service Request" 196, 203 Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based Service CBS 229
"Service requirements" 80, 203, 226
R e
fe re
n ce
265
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Service requirements 79 "Set date" 83 "Set time" 82 "Settings" 207 Settings changing settings on the
Control Display 86 clock, 12h/24h mode 82 date format 83 language 86 Settings and information 78 "Settings" for unlocking 30 Settings menu, refer to
i menu 17 Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on times 108
Shifting gears automatic transmission with
Steptronic 62 manual transmission 61 Shiftlock automatic transmission,
refer to Changing selector lever positions 62
Short commands for the voice command system 248
Shortest route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 145
"Short route" in navigation 145
"Show current position" 140 "Show destination
position" 140 Shuffled, refer to Random CD changer 176 CD player 176 Side airbags 97 Side windows, refer to
Windows 38 Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11 Sitting safely 45 with airbags 45 with head restraint 45 with safety belts 45 Ski bag 119
Ski bag for convertible, refer to Through-loading opening with integrated transport bag 120
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to Glass roof, electric 39
Slot for remote control 59 Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 116 Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage compartment 114
Socket, On-Board Diagnosis OBD 230
Socket, refer to Connecting electrical appliances 116
Song search, refer to Playing a track 175
SOS, refer to Sending an Emergency Request 236
Sound output for entertainment on/off 160
Spare fuses, 235 Spare fuses, refer to
Fuses 235 Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation system 150
Speed Run-Flat Tires 93 with winter tires 223 Speed-dependent volume
control 161 Speed limit 85 Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 85 Speedometer 12 "Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 162 Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and headlamps 65
Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 89
Start/stop button 59 starting the engine 60 switching off the engine 60 "Start guidance" 137
Starting, refer to Starting the engine 60
Starting assistance, refer to Jump starting 237
Starting difficulties jump starting 237 Starting the engine start/stop button 59 Start menu 17 "Start service" 202 "Start Service" for BMW
Assist 204 "State / Province" in
destination entry 135 Station refer to Radio 164 "Status" 80 Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5 Steering wheel 53 adjustment 53 buttons on steering
wheel 11 lock 59 locking with convenient
access 37 "Steering wheel buttons" 54 Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 96 Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with Steptronic 61
"Stopwatch" 86 Stopwatch 86 Storage compartments 114 Storage nets 118 "Store" for satellite radio 172 "Store in address book" in
navigation 143 "Store" on the radio 166 Storing current position 143 Storing radio stations 166 Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 50 Storing tires 223 Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 114 "Street" in destination
entry 137
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
266
Summer tires, refer to Wheels and tires 212
Surface ice, refer to Outside temperature warning 74
"Surround Settings", refer to Tone control 162
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching off engine 60 Switching off the engine start/stop button 59 Switching on audio 160 CD changer 160 CD player 160 radio 160 Switching on the hour
signal 82 Switching the cooling function
on and off 107 Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 108 Symbols 4 navigation system 154 status information 20 traffic info for navigation
system 151
T Tachometer 74 Tail lamps 233 replacing bulb 233 Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 247 Technical data 244 capacities 247 dimensions 245 Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5 Telematics, refer to
TeleService, BMW Assist 201
Telephone installation location, refer to
Center armrest 114 refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Telephone, refer to Mobile phone 186
"Telephone list" 54 TeleService 203 Temperature automatic climate
control 105 changing unit of measure 78 coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 75 Temperature display outside temperature 74 outside temperature
warning 74 setting the units 78 Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66 Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 128 "Terminate services" 206 "Text language" 86 "Theater" for Tone
control 162 The individual vehicle 5 Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 234 Through-loading opening with
integrated transport bag 120
Through-loading system 117 Tilt alarm sensor 36 Tilt function, passenger-side
mirror 53 "Time" 82 "Time / Date" 82, 83 "Time format" 82 Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 108 "Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation/heating 109 "Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation/heating 109 Tire inflation pressure 212 loss 93, 94 Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 92
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 93
resetting the system 94 system limitations 93 warning lamp 95 Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 93 Tire Quality Grading 220 Tires age 220, 221 air loss 95 breaking in 124 changing, refer to Changing
wheels 234 condition 221 damage 221 inflation pressure 212 labels 220 minimum tread depth 221 new wheels and tires 222 pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 92 pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 93
puncture 93 replacing 222 Run-Flat 222 size 220 storage 223 tread depth 221 wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 221 wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and tires 222
winter tires 223 TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 151 "Tone" 161 Tone in audio mode adjusting 161 middle setting 163 Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 231 Top, refer to Retractable
hardtop 41 "Top 8" for mobile phone 194
R e
fe re
n ce
267
A t
a g
la n
ce C
o n
tr o
ls D
ri vi
n g
t ip
s C
om m
un ic
at io
ns N
a vi
g a
ti o
n E
n te
rt a
in m
e n
t M
o b
il it
y
Torque, refer to Engine data 244
Touch tone dialing 196 Tow bar 239 Tow fitting 239 screw thread 239 Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 239 Towing 238 car with automatic
transmission 238 methods 239 Towing and tow-starting 238 Town/city for destination 135 "Town / City" in destination
entry 135 Tow rope 240 Tow-starting 238, 240 "TPM" 94 TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 93 Tracks random play sequence 176 sampling, Scan 175 searching for 175 Track width, refer to
Dimensions 245 Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability Control 89
Traffic information for navigation
calling up 152 display on route map 153 during destination
guidance 154 switching on/off 151 symbols 154 "Traffic Info settings" 152 Traffic jam displaying traffic
information 151 driving around 154
Transmission automatic transmission with
Steptronic 61 manual transmission 61 overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission with Steptronic 63
Transmission interlock refer to Changing selector
lever position 62 refer to P Park 62 Transporting children
safely 56 Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 128 Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 221 Treble, refer to Treble and
bass 161 Treble, tone control 161 "Trip computer" 77 Trip computer 77 Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 74 "Triple turn signal" 64 Triple turn signal activation 64 Trip odometer 74 Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid 33 Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 245 Turn signal indicators indicator/warning lamp 12 triple turn signal 64 Turn signals 63 Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 128
U Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ UTQR 220
"Units" 78 Units average consumption 78 temperature 78
Universal garage door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 110
Universal mobile phone preparation package, refer to separate Owner's Manual
Universal remote control 110 Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 36 "Unlock button" 30 Unlocking from inside 33 from outside 29 luggage compartment lid 37 without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 36 "Update services" 205 USB-audio interface 180 "USB" for audio
mode 179, 181
V Vehicle battery 235 breaking in 124 care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure cargo loading 127 Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 225 measurements, refer to
Dimensions 245 parking 60 washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure weight 247 "Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30 Vehicle decommissioning refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure Vehicle jack 235 Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current position 155
Ventilation 107 draft-free 108 in the rear 108
E ve
ry th
in g
fr o
m A
-Z
268
Ventilation, refer to Climate 104
Ventilation while at a standstill 108
Vents, refer to Ventilation 107 "Vent settings" 105 Voice commands overview 23 short commands 248 Voice instructions from
navigation system 150 muting 55, 151 repeating 55, 151 switching on/off 150 volume 151 Voice phone book 198 Volume 160 audio sources 160 fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 247 mobile phone 191 speed-dependent
control 161 voice instructions 151 Volume distribution front/rear 161 left/right 161
W Warning and indicator
lamps 13 Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 83 Warning triangle 237 Washer fluid 65 content of the reservoir 65 Washer fluid reservoir 65 Washing the car, refer to
Caring for your vehicle brochure
Waste tray, refer to Ashtray 116
Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 126
Waveband with the radio 164 Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 221 Weights 247
Welcome lamps 100 "Welcome light" 101 Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and tires 222
Wheelbase, refer to Dimensions 245
Wheels, new 222 Wheels and tires 212 Width, refer to
Dimensions 245 Wind deflector 42 Windows 38 convenient operation 30 convenient operation with
convenient access 37 opening, closing 38 pinch protection system 39 Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16 Windshield cleaning 65 Windshield wash 64 filling capacity, reservoir 247 nozzles 65 reservoir for washer fluid 65 washer fluid 65 Windshield wiper blades,
changing 231 Windshield wipers, blades,
care, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure
Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 64
Winter tires 223 setting speed limit 85 storage 223 Wiper blade replacement 231 Wiper system 64 "With highways" in
navigation 145 Wooden trim, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure Word-matching principle for
navigation 146 Work in the engine
compartment 224 Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 231
X xDrive 90 Xenon lamps replacing bulb 232
Y Your individual vehicle settings, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Related manuals for BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
en
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the 3 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 3 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 3 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 335i Convertible 3 Series 2008 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.